Final Government Distribution                                      Chapter 5                                              IPCC AR6 WGIII



 1   Table of Contents
 2   Chapter 5:            Demand, services and social aspects of mitigation .................................................... 5-1
 3     Executive summary.......................................................................................................................... 5-3
 4     5.1        Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 5-8
 5     5.2        Services, well-being and equity in demand-side mitigation .............................................. 5-14
 6        5.2.1          Metrics of well-being and their relationship to GHG emissions ................................ 5-14
 7        5.2.2          Inequity in access to basic energy use and services ................................................... 5-19
 8        5.2.3          Equity, trust, and participation in demand-side mitigation ........................................ 5-27
 9     5.3        Mapping the opportunity space                                                                                           5-36
10        5.3.1          Efficient service provision ......................................................................................... 5-37
11        5.3.2          Technical tools to identify Avoid-Shift-Improve options .......................................... 5-44
12        5.3.3          Low demand scenarios ............................................................................................... 5-47
13        5.3.4          Transformative megatrends........................................................................................ 5-56
14     5.4        Transition toward high well-being and low-carbon demand societies ............................... 5-67
15        5.4.1          Behavioural Drivers ................................................................................................... 5-68
16        5.4.2          Socio-cultural drivers of climate mitigation .............................................................. 5-80
17        5.4.3          Business and Corporate Drivers ................................................................................. 5-84
18        5.4.4          Institutional Drivers ................................................................................................... 5-85
19        5.4.5          Technological/Infrastructural Drivers ........................................................................ 5-86
20     5.5        An integrative view on transitioning .................................................................................. 5-89
21        5.5.1          Demand-side transitions as multi-dimensional processes .......................................... 5-89
22        5.5.2          Phases in transitions ................................................................................................... 5-90
23        5.5.3          Feasible rate of change ............................................................................................... 5-91
24     5.6        Governance and policy....................................................................................................... 5-95
25        5.6.1          Governing mitigation: participation and social trust .................................................. 5-95
26        5.6.2          Policies to strengthen Avoid-Shift-Improve .............................................................. 5-96
27        5.6.3          Policies in transition phases ..................................................................................... 5-101
28        5.6.4          Policy sequencing and packaging to strengthen enabling conditions ...................... 5-102
29     5.7        Knowledge gaps ............................................................................................................... 5-105
30     Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) ........................................................................................... 5-106
31     Reference ..................................................................................................................................... 5-108
32
33
34
35




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                                        5-2                                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   Executive summary
 2   Assessment of the social science literature and regional case studies reveals how social norms, culture,
 3   and individual choices, interact with infrastructure and other structural changes over time. This provides
 4   new insight into climate change mitigation strategies, and how economic and social activity might be
 5   organised across sectors to support emission reductions. To enhance well-being, people demand
 6   services and not primary energy and physical resources per se. Focusing on demand for services and
 7   the different social and political roles people play broadens the participation in climate action.
 8
 9   Potential of demand-side actions and service provisioning systems
10
11   Demand-side mitigation and new ways of providing services can help avoid, shift, and improve
12   final service demand. Rapid and deep changes in demand make it easier for every sector to reduce
13   GHG emissions in the short and medium term (high confidence). {5.2, 5.3}
14
15   The indicative potential of demand-side strategies across all sectors to reduce emissions is 40-70%
16   by 2050 (high confidence). Technical mitigation potentials compared to the IEA WEO, 2020 STEPS
17   baseline amounts up to 5.7 GtCO2eq for building use and construction, 8 GtCO2eq for food demand,
18   6.5 GtCO2eq for land transport, and 5.2 GtCO2eq for industry. Mitigation strategies can be classified as
19   Avoid-Shift-Improve (ASI) options, that reflect opportunities for socio-cultural, infrastructural, and
20   technological change. The greatest Avoid potential comes from reducing long-haul aviation and
21   providing short-distance low-carbon urban infrastructures. The greatest Shift potential would come from
22   switching to plant-based diets. The greatest Improve potential comes from within the building sector,
23   and in particular increased use of energy efficient end-use technologies and passive housing. {5.3.1,
24   5.3.2, Figure 5.7, Figure 5.8, Table 5.1, Table SM.2}
25
26   Socio-cultural and lifestyle changes can accelerate climate change mitigation (medium
27   confidence). Among 60 identified actions that could change individual consumption, individual
28   mobility choices have the largest potential to reduce carbon footprints. Prioritizing car-free mobility by
29   walking and cycling and adoption of electric mobility could save 2 tCO2eq cap-1 yr-1. Other options with
30   high mitigation potential include reducing air travel, cooling setpoint adjustments, reduced appliance
31   use, shifts to public transit, and shifting consumption towards plant-based diets. {5.3.1, 5.3.1.2, Figure
32   5.8}
33
34   Leveraging improvements in end-use service delivery through behavioural and technological
35   innovations, and innovations in market organisation, leads to large reductions in upstream
36   resource use (high confidence). Analysis of indicative potentials range from a factor 10 to 20 fold
37   improvement in the case of available energy (exergy) analysis, with the highest improvement potentials
38   at the end-user and service-provisioning levels. Realisable service level efficiency improvements could
39   reduce upstream energy demand by 45% in 2050. {5.3.2, Figure 5.10}
40
41   Alternative service provision systems, for example those enabled through digitalisation, sharing
42   economy initiatives and circular economy initiatives, have to date made a limited contribution to
43   climate change mitigation (medium confidence). While digitalisation through specific new products
44   and applications holds potential for improvement in service-level efficiencies, without public policies
45   and regulations, it also has the potential to increase consumption and energy use. Reducing the energy
46   use of data centres, networks, and connected devices is possible in managing low-carbon digitalisation.
47   Claims on the benefits of the circular economy for sustainability and climate change mitigation have
48   limited evidence. {5.3.4, 5.3.4.1, 5.3.4.2, Figure 5.12, Figure 5.13}
49


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-3                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   Social aspects of demand-side mitigation actions
 2
 3   Decent living standards (DLS) and well-being for all are achievable through the implementation
 4   of high-efficiency low demand mitigation pathways (medium confidence). Decent Living Standards
 5   (DLS) – a benchmark of material conditions for human well-being – overlaps with many Sustainable
 6   Development Goals (SDGs). Minimum requirements of energy use consistent with enabling well-being
 7   for all is between 20 and 50 GJ cap-1 yr-1 depending on the context. {5.2.2.1, 5.2.2.2, Box 5.3}
 8
 9   Providing better services with less energy and resource input has high technical potential and is
10   consistent with providing well-being for all (medium confidence). Assessment of 19 demand-side
11   mitigation options and 18 different constituents of well-being show that positive impacts on well-being
12   outweigh negative ones by a factor of 11. {5.2, 5.2.3, Figure 5.6,}
13
14   Demand-side mitigation options bring multiple interacting benefits (high confidence). Energy
15   services to meet human needs for nutrition, shelter, health, etc. are met in many different ways with
16   different emissions implications that depend on local contexts, cultures, geography, available
17   technologies, social preferences. In the near term, many less-developed countries and poor people
18   everywhere require better access to safe and low-emissions energy sources to ensure decent living
19   standards and increase energy savings from service improvements by about 20-25%. {5.2, 5.4.5, Figure
20   5.3, Figure 5.4, Figure 5.5, Figure 5.6, Box 5.2, Box 5.3}
21
22   Granular technologies and decentralized energy end-use, characterised by modularity, small unit
23   sizes and small unit costs, diffuse faster into markets and are associated with faster technological
24   learning benefits, greater efficiency, more opportunities to escape technological lock-in, and
25   greater employment (high confidence). Examples include solar photovoltaic systems, batteries, and
26   thermal heat pumps. {5.3, 5.5, 5.5.3}
27
28   Wealthy individuals contribute disproportionately to higher emissions and have a high potential
29   for emissions reductions while maintaining decent living standards and well-being (high
30   confidence). Individuals with high socio-economic status are capable of reducing their GHG emissions
31   by becoming role models of low-carbon lifestyles, investing in low-carbon businesses, and advocating
32   for stringent climate policies. {5.4.1, 5.4.3, 5.4.4, Figure 5.14}
33
34   Demand-side solutions require both motivation and capacity for change (high confidence).
35   Motivation by individuals or households worldwide to change energy consumption behaviour is
36   generally low. Individual behavioural change is insufficient for climate change mitigation unless
37   embedded in structural and cultural change. Different factors influence individual motivation and
38   capacity for change in different demographics and geographies. These factors go beyond traditional
39   socio-demographic and economic predictors and include psychological variables such as awareness,
40   perceived risk, subjective and social norms, values, and perceived behavioural control. Behavioural
41   nudges promote easy behaviour change, e.g., “improve” actions such as making investments in energy
42   efficiency, but fail to motivate harder lifestyle changes. (high confidence) {5.4}
43
44   Meta-analyses demonstrate that behavioural interventions, including the way choices are
45   presented to consumers1, work synergistically with price signals, making the combination more
46   effective (medium confidence). Behavioural interventions through nudges, and alternative ways of
47   redesigning and motivating decisions, alone provide small to medium contributions to reduce energy


     FOOTNOTE 1 The way choices are presented to consumers is known as ‘choice architecture’ in the field of
     behavioural economics.


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-4                                Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   consumption and GHG emissions. Green defaults, such as automatic enrolment in “green energy”
 2   provision, are highly effective. Judicious labelling, framing, and communication of social norms can
 3   also increase the effect of mandates, subsidies, or taxes. {5.4, 5.4.1, Table 5.3a, Table 5.3b}
 4
 5   Coordinated change in several domains leads to the emergence of new low-carbon configurations
 6   with cascading mitigation effects (high confidence). Demand-side transitions involve interacting and
 7   sometimes antagonistic processes on the behavioural, socio-cultural, institutional, business, and
 8   technological dimensions. Individual or sectoral level change may be stymied by reinforcing social,
 9   infrastructural, and cultural lock-ins. Coordinating the way choices are presented to end users and
10   planners, physical infrastructures, new technologies and related business models can rapidly realise
11   system-level change. {5.4.2, 5.4.3, 5.4.4, 5.4.5, 5.5}
12
13   Cultural change, in combination with new or adapted infrastructure, is necessary to enable and
14   realise many Avoid and Shift options (medium confidence). By drawing support from diverse actors,
15   narratives of change can enable coalitions to form, providing the basis for social movements to
16   campaign in favour of (or against) societal transformations. People act and contribute to climate change
17   mitigation in their diverse capacities as consumers, citizens, professionals, role models, investors, and
18   policymakers. {5.4, 5.5, 5.6}
19
20   Collective action as part of social or lifestyle movements underpins system change (high
21   confidence). Collective action and social organising are crucial to shift the possibility space of public
22   policy on climate change mitigation. For example, climate strikes have given voice to youth in more
23   than 180 countries. In other instances, mitigation policies allow the active participation of all
24   stakeholders, resulting in building social trust, new coalitions, legitimising change, and thus initiate a
25   positive cycle in climate governance capacity and policies. {5.4.2, Figure 5.14}
26
27   Transition pathways and changes in social norms often start with pilot experiments led by
28   dedicated individuals and niche groups (high confidence). Collectively, such initiatives can find
29   entry points to prompt policy, infrastructure, and policy reconfigurations, supporting the further uptake
30   of technological and lifestyle innovations. Individuals’ agency is central as social change agents and
31   narrators of meaning. These bottom-up socio-cultural forces catalyse a supportive policy environment,
32   which enables changes. {5.5.2}
33
34   The current effects of climate change, as well as some mitigation strategies, are threatening the
35   viability of existing business practices, while some corporate efforts also delay mitigation action
36   (medium confidence). Policy packages the include job creation programs help to preserve social trust,
37   livelihoods, respect, and dignity of all workers and employees involved. Business models that protect
38   rent extracting behaviour may sometimes delay political action. Corporate advertisement and
39   brand building strategies may also attempt to deflect corporate responsibility to individuals or aim to
40   appropriate climate care sentiments in their own brand–building. {5.4.3, 5.6.4}
41
42   Middle actors -professionals, experts, and regulators- play a crucial albeit underestimated and
43   underutilised role in establishing low-carbon standards and practices (medium confidence).
44   Building managers, landlords, energy efficiency advisers, technology installers, and car dealers
45   influence patterns of mobility and energy consumption by acting as middle actors or intermediaries in
46   the provision of building or mobility services and need greater capacity and motivation to play this role.
47   {5.4.3}
48
49   Social influencers and thought leaders can increase the adoption of low-carbon technologies,
50   behaviours, and lifestyles (high confidence). Preferences are malleable and can align with a cultural


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-5                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   shift. The modelling of such shifts by salient and respected community members can help bring about
 2   changes in different service provisioning systems. Between 10% and 30% of committed individuals are
 3   required to set new social norms. {5.2.1, 5.4}
 4
 5   Preconditions and instruments to enable demand-side transformation
 6
 7   Social equity reinforces capacity and motivation for mitigating climate change (medium
 8   confidence). Impartial governance such as fair treatment by law and order institutions, fair treatment
 9   by gender, and income equity, increases social trust, thus enabling demand-side climate policies. High
10   status (often high carbon) item consumption may be reduced by taxing absolute wealth without
11   compromising well-being. {5.2, 5.4.2, 5.6}
12
13   Policies that increase the political access and participation of women, racialized, and marginalised
14   groups, increase the democratic impetus for climate action. (high confidence). Including more
15   differently situated knowledge and diverse perspectives makes climate mitigation policies more
16   effective. {5.2, 5.6}
17
18   Carbon pricing is most effective if revenues are redistributed or used impartially (high
19   confidence). A carbon levy earmarked for green infrastructures or saliently returned to taxpayers
20   corresponding to widely accepted notions of fairness increases the political acceptability of carbon
21   pricing. {5.6, Box 5.11}
22
23   Greater contextualisation and granularity in policy approaches better addresses the challenges
24   of rapid transitions towards zero-carbon systems (high confidence). Larger systems take more time
25   to evolve, grow, and change compared to smaller ones. Creating and scaling up entirely new systems
26   takes longer than replacing existing technologies and practices. Late adopters tend to adopt faster than
27   early pioneers. Obstacles and feasibility barriers are high in the early transition phases. Barriers decrease
28   as a result of technical and social learning processes, network building, scale economies, cultural
29   debates, and institutional adjustments. {5.5, 5.6}
30
31   The lockdowns implemented in many countries in response to the COVID-19 pandemic
32   demonstrated that behavioural change at a massive scale and in a short time is possible (high
33   confidence). COVID-19 accelerated some specific trends, such as an uptake in urban cycling. However,
34   the acceptability of collective social change over a longer term towards less resource-intensive lifestyles
35   depends on social mandate building through public participation, discussion and debate over
36   information provided by experts, to produce recommendations that inform policy-making. {Box 5.2}
37
38   Mitigation policies that integrate and communicate with the values people hold are more
39   successful (high confidence). Values differ between cultures. Measures that support autonomy, energy
40   security and safety, equity and environmental protection, and fairness resonate well in many
41   communities and social groups. Changing from a commercialised, individualised, entrepreneurial
42   training model to an education cognizant of planetary health and human well-being can accelerate
43   climate change awareness and action {5.4.1, 5.4.2}
44
45   Changes in consumption choices that are supported by structural changes and political action
46   enable the uptake of low-carbon choices (high confidence). Policy instruments applied in
47   coordination can help to accelerate change in a consistent desired direction. Targeted technological
48   change, regulation, and public policy can help in steering digitalization, the sharing economy, and
49   circular economy towards climate change mitigation. {5.3, 5.6}
50


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-6                                  Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

1   Complementarity in policies helps in the design of an optimal demand-side policy mix (medium
2   confidence). In the case of energy efficiency, for example, this may involve CO2 pricing, standards and
3   norms, and information feedback.{5.3, 5.4, 5.6}
4
5




    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-7                                Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   5.1 Introduction
 2   The Sixth Assessment Report of the IPCC (AR6), for the first time, features a chapter on demand,
 3   services, and social aspects of mitigation. It builds on the AR4, which linked behaviour and lifestyle
 4   change to mitigating climate change (IPCC 2007; Roy and Pal 2009; IPCC 2014a), the Global Energy
 5   Assessment (Roy et al. 2012), and the AR5, which identified sectoral demand-side mitigation options
 6   across chapters (IPCC 2014b; Creutzig et al. 2016b; IPCC 2014a). The literature on the nature, scale,
 7   implementation and implications of demand-side solutions, and associated changes in lifestyles, social
 8   norms, and well-being, has been growing rapidly (Creutzig et al. 2021a) (Box 5.2). Demand-side
 9   solutions support near-term climate change mitigation (Méjean et al. 2019; Wachsmuth and Duscha
10   2019) and include consumers’ technology choices, behaviours, lifestyle changes, coupled production-
11   consumption infrastructures and systems, service provision strategies, and associated socio-technical
12   transitions. This chapter’s assessment of the social sciences (also see Supplementary Materials I Chapter
13   5) reveals that social dynamics at different levels offer diverse entry points for acting on and mitigating
14   climate change (Jorgenson et al. 2018).
15
16   Three entry points are relevant for this chapter. First, well-designed demand for services scenarios are
17   consistent with adequate levels of well-being for everyone (Rao and Baer 2012; Grubler et al. 2018;
18   Mastrucci et al. 2020; Millward-Hopkins et al. 2020), with high and/or improved quality of life (Max-
19   Neef 1995), improved levels of happiness (Easterlin et al. 2010) and sustainable human development
20   (Arrow et al. 2013; Dasgupta and Dasgupta 2017).
21
22   Second, demand-side solutions support staying within planetary boundaries (Haberl et al. 2014; Matson
23   et al. 2016; Hillebrand et al. 2018; Andersen and Quinn 2020; UNDESA 2020; Hickel et al. 2021;
24   Keyßer and Lenzen 2021): they entail fewer environmental risks than many supply side technologies
25   (Von Stechow et al. 2016) and make carbon dioxide removal technologies, such as Bio-Energy with
26   Carbon Capture and Storage (BECCS) less relevant (Van Vuuren et al. 2018) or possibly irrelevant in
27   modelling studies (Grubler et al. 2018; Hickel et al. 2021; Keyßer and Lenzen 2021) still requiring
28   ecosystem based carbon dioxide removal. In the IPCC’s SR1.5C (IPCC 2018), four stylised scenarios
29   have explored possible pathways towards stabilising global warming at 1.5°C (SPM SR.15 Figure 3a
30   (IPCC 2014a), (Figure 5.1) One of these scenarios, LED-19, investigates the scope of demand-side
31   solutions (Figure 5.1). The comparison of scenarios reveals that such low-energy demand pathways
32   eliminate the need for technologies with high uncertainty, such as BECCS.
33
34   Third, interrogating demand for services from the well-being perspective also opens new avenues for
35   assessing mitigation potentials (Brand-Correa and Steinberger 2017; Mastrucci and Rao 2017; Rao and
36   Min 2018a; Mastrucci and Rao 2019; Baltruszewicz et al. 2021). Arguably, demand-side interventions
37   often operate institutionally or in terms of restoring natural functioning and have so far been politically
38   side lined but COVID-19 revealed interesting perspectives (Box 5.2). Such demand-side solutions also
39   support near-term goals towards climate change mitigation and reduce the need for politically
40   challenging high global carbon prices (Méjean et al. 2019) (Box 5.11). The well-being focus emphasises
41   equity and universal need satisfaction, compatible with Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs)
42   progress (Lamb and Steinberger 2017).
43
44   The requisites for well-being include collective and social interactions as well as consumption-based
45   material inputs. Moreover, rather than material inputs per se, people need and demand services for
46   dignified survival, sustenance, mobility, communication, comfort and material well-being (Nakićenović
47   et al. 1996b; Johansson et al. 2012; Creutzig et al. 2018). These services may be provided in many
48   different context-specific ways using physical resources (biomass, energy, materials, etc.) and available
49   technologies (e.g. cooking tools, appliances). Here we understand demand as demand for services


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-8                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   (often requiring material input), with particular focus on services that are required for well-being (such
 2   as lighting, accessibility, shelter, etc.), and that are shaped by culturally and geographically
 3   differentiated social aspects, choice architectures and the built environment (infrastructures).
 4
 5   Focusing on demand for services broadens the climate solution space beyond technological switches
 6   confined to the supply side, to include solutions that maintain or improve well-being related to nutrition,
 7   shelter and mobility while (sometimes radically) reducing energy and material input levels (Creutzig et
 8   al. 2018; Cervantes Barron 2020; Baltruszewicz et al. 2021; Kikstra et al. 2021b). This also recognises
 9   that mitigation policies are politically, economically and socially more feasible, as well as more
10   effective, when there is a two-way alignment between climate action and well-being (OECD 2019a).
11   There is medium evidence and high agreement that well-designed demand for services scenarios are
12   consistent with adequate levels of well-being for everyone (Rao and Baer 2012; Grubler et al. 2018;
13   Rao et al. 2019b; Millward-Hopkins et al. 2020; Kikstra et al. 2021b), with high and/or improved quality
14   of life (Max-Neef 1995; Vogel et al. 2021) and improved levels of happiness (Easterlin et al. 2010) and
15   sustainable human development (Gadrey and Jany-Catrice 2006; Arrow et al. 2013; Dasgupta and
16   Dasgupta 2017). While demand for services is high as development levels increase, and related
17   emissions are growing in many countries (Yumashev et al. 2020; Bamisile et al. 2021), there is also
18   evidence that provisioning systems delink services provided from emissions (Conte Grand 2016; Patra
19   et al. 2017; Kavitha et al. 2020). Various mitigation strategies, often classified into Avoid-Shift-
20   Improve (ASI) options, effectively reduce primary energy demand and/or material input (Haas et al.
21   2015; Haberl et al. 2017; Samadi et al. 2017; Hausknost et al. 2018; Haberl et al. 2019; Van den Berg
22   et al. 2019; Ivanova et al. 2020). Users’ participation in decisions about how services are provided, not
23   just their technological feasibility, is an important determinant of their effectiveness and sustainability
24   (Whittle et al. 2019; Vanegas Cantarero 2020).
25
26   Sector-specific mitigation approaches (Chapters 6-11) emphasise the potential of mitigation via
27   improvements in energy- and materials- efficient manufacturing (Gutowski et al. 2013; Gramkow and
28   Anger-Kraavi 2019; Olatunji et al. 2019; Wang et al. 2019), new product design (Fischedick et al.
29   2014), energy-efficient buildings (Lucon et al. 2014), shifts in diet (Bajželj et al. 2014; Smith et al.
30   2014), and transport infrastructure design shifts (Sims et al. 2014), compact urban forms (Seto et al.
31   2014). In this chapter, service-related mitigation strategies are categorized as Avoid, Shift, or Improve
32   (ASI) options to show how mitigation potentials, and social groups who can deliver them, are much
33   broader than usually considered in traditional sector-specific presentations. ASI originally arose from
34   the need to assess the staging and combinations of interrelated mitigation options in the provision of
35   transportation services (Hidalgo and Huizenga 2013). In the context of transportation services, ASI
36   seeks to mitigate emissions through avoiding as much transport service demand as possible (e.g.,
37   telework to eliminate commutes, mixed-use urban zoning to shorten commute distances), shifting
38   remaining demand to more efficient modes (e.g., bus rapid transit replacing passenger vehicles), and
39   improving the carbon intensity of modes utilised (e.g., electric buses powered by renewables) (Creutzig
40   et al. 2016a). This chapter summarises ASI options and potentials across sectors and generalises the
41   definitions. ‘Avoid’ refers to all mitigation options that reduce unnecessary (in the sense of being not
42   required to deliver the desired service output) energy consumption by redesigning service provisioning
43   systems; ‘shift’ refers to the switch to already existing competitive efficient technologies and service
44   provisioning systems; and ‘improve’ refers to improvements in efficiency in existing technologies. The
45   Avoid-Shift-Improve framing operates in three domains: ‘Socio-cultural’, where social norms, culture,
46   and individual choices play an important role – a category especially but not only relevant for avoid
47   options; ‘Infrastructure’, which provides the cost and benefit landscape for realising options and is
48   particularly relevant for shift options; and ‘Technologies’, especially important for the improve options.
49   Avoid, Shift, and Improve choices will be made by individuals and households, instigated by salient
50   and respected role models and novel social norms, but require support by adequate infrastructures


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-9                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   designed by urban planners and building and transport professionals, corresponding investments, and a
 2   political culture supportive of mitigation action. This is particularly true for many Avoid and Shift
 3   decisions that are difficult because they encounter psychological barriers of breaking routines, habits
 4   and imagining new lifestyles and the social costs of not conforming to society (Kaiser 2006). Simpler
 5   Improve decisions like energy efficiency investments on the other hand can be triggered and sustained
 6   by traditional policy instruments complemented by behavioural nudges.
 7
 8   A key concern about climate change mitigation policies is that they may reduce quality of life. Based
 9   on growing literature, in this chapter we adopt the concept of Decent Living Standards (DLS, explained
10   further in relation to other individual and collective well-being measures and concepts in the Social
11   Sciences Primer) as a universal set of service requirements essential for achieving basic human well-
12   being. DLS includes the dimensions of nutrition, shelter, living condition, clothing, health care,
13   education, and mobility (Frye et al. 2018; Rao and Min 2018b). DLS provides a fair, direct way to
14   understand the basic low-carbon energy needs of society and specifies the underlying material and
15   energy requirements. This chapter also comprehensively assesses related well-being metrics that result
16   from demand-side action observing overall positive effects (5.3). Similarly, ambitious low-emissions
17   demand-side scenarios suggest that well-being could be maintained or improved while reducing global
18   final energy demand, and some current literature estimates that it is possible to meet Decent Living
19   Standards for all within the 2-degree warming window (Grubler et al. 2018; Burke 2020; Keyßer and
20   Lenzen 2021) (5.4). A key concern here is how to blend new technologies with social change to integrate
21   Improving ways of living, Shifting modalities and Avoiding certain kinds of emissions altogether (5.6).
22   Social practice theory emphasizes that material stocks and social relations are key in forming and
23   maintaining habits (Reckwitz 2002; Haberl et al. 2021) . This chapter reflects these insights by assessing
24   the role of infrastructures and social norms in GHG emission intensive or low-carbon lifestyles (5.4).
25   A core operational principle for sustainable development is equitable access to services to provide well-
26   being for all, while minimising resource inputs and environmental and social externalities/trade-offs,
27   underpinning the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) (Princen 2003; Lamb and Steinberger 2017;
28   Dasgupta and Dasgupta 2017). Sustainable development is not possible without changes in
29   consumption patterns within the widely recognised constraints of planetary boundaries, resource
30   availability, and the need to provide decent living standards for all (Langhelle 2000; Toth and Szigeti
31   2016; O’Neill et al. 2018). Inversely, reduced poverty and higher social equity offer opportunities for
32   delinking demand for services from emissions, e.g., via more long-term decision making after having
33   escaped poverty traps and by reduced demand for non-well-being enhancing status consumption (Nabi
34   et al. 2020; Ortega-Ruiz et al. 2020; Parker and Bhatti 2020; Teame and Habte 2020) (5.3).
35
36   Throughout this chapter we discuss how people can realise various opportunities to reduce GHG
37   emission-intensive consumption (5.2 and 5.3), and act in various roles (5.4), within an enabling
38   environment created by policy instruments and infrastructure that builds on social dynamics (5.6).




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-10                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII




 1
 2
 3   Figure 5.1 Low Energy Demand (LED) Scenario needs no BEECS and needs less decarbonisation efforts.
 4   Dependence of the size of the mitigation effort to reach a 1.5 oC climate target (cumulative GtCO2 emission
 5     reduction 2020-2100 by option) as a function of the level of energy demand (average global final energy
 6    demand 2020-2100 in EJ yr-1) in baseline and corresponding 1.5oC scenarios (1.9 W m-2 radiative forcing
 7      change) based on the IPCC Special Report on 1.5oC global warming (data obtained from the scenario
 8       explorer database, LED baseline emission data obtained from authors). In this figure an example of
 9   remaining carbon budget of 400 Gt has been taken (from Rogelj, 2019 ) for illustrative purpose. 400 Gt is
10        also the number given in Table SPM.2 (pg. 29, IPCC 2021) for a probability of 67% to limit global
11                                                warming to 1.5oC .

12
13   START BOX 5.1 HERE
14
15               Box 5.1 Bibliometric foundation of demand-side climate change mitigation

16   A bibliometric overview of the literature found 99,065 academic peer-reviewed papers identified with
17   34 distinct search queries addressing relevant content of this chapter (Creutzig et al. 2021a). The
18   literature is growing rapidly (15% yr-1) and the literature body assessed in the AR6 period (2014-2020)
19   is twice as large as all literature published before.
20
21   A large part of the literature is highly repetitive and/or includes no concepts or little quantitative or
22   qualitative data of relevance to this chapter. For example, a systematic review on economic growth and
23   decoupling identified more than 11,500 papers treating this topic, but only 834 of those, i.e. 7%,
24   included relevant data (Wiedenhofer et al. 2020). In another systematic review, assessing quantitative
25   estimates of consumption-based solutions (Ivanova et al. 2020), only 0.8% of papers were considered
26   after consistency criteria were enforced. Altogether, we relied on systematic reviews wherever possible.
27   Other important papers were not captured by systematic reviews, but included in this chapter through
28   expert judgement. Based on topical modelling and relevance coding of resulting topics, the full literature
29   body can be mapped into two dimensions, where spatial relationships indicate topical distance (Box
30   5.1, Figure 1). The interpretation of topic demonstrates that the literature organises in four clusters of
31   high relevance for demand-side solutions (housing, mobility, food, and policy), whereas other clusters


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-11                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   (nature,         energy           supply)           are          relatively         less          relevant.




 2
 3        Box 5.1, Figure 1 Map of the literature on demand, services and social aspects of climate change
 4                                                     mitigation.
 5     Dots show document positions obtained by reducing the 60-dimensional topic scores to two dimensions
 6    aiming to preserve similarity in overall topic score. The two axes therefore have no direct interpretation
 7      but represent a reduced version of similarities between documents across 60 topics. Documents are
 8   coloured by query category. Topic labels of the 24 most relevant topics are placed in the centre of each of
 9   the large clusters of documents associated with each topic. % value in caption indicates the proportion of
10                                       studies in each “relevance” bracket.
11                                          Source: (Creutzig et al. 2021a)
12   END BOX 5.1 HERE
13
14   Section 5.2 provides evidence on the links among mitigation and well-being, services, equity, trust, and
15   governance. Section 5.3 quantifies the demand-side opportunity space for mitigation, relying on the
16   Avoid, Shift and Improve framework. Section 5.4 assesses the relevant contribution of different parts
17   of society to climate change mitigation. Section 5.5 evaluates the overall dynamics of social transition
18   processes while Section 5.6 summarises insights on governance and policy packages for demand-side
19   mitigation and well-being. A Social Science Primer defines and discusses key terms and social science
20   concepts used in the context of climate change mitigation.


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-12                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1
 2   START BOX 5.2 HERE
 3
 4                Box 5.2 COVID-19, service provisioning and climate change mitigation

 5   There is now high evidence and high agreement that the COVID-19 pandemic has increased the political
 6   feasibility of large-scale government actions to support the services for provision of public goods,
 7   including climate change policies. Many behavioural changes due to COVID-19 reinforce sufficiency
 8   and emphasis on solidarity, economies built around care, livelihood protection, collective action, and
 9   basic service provision, linked to reduced emissions.
10
11   COVID-19 led to direct and indirect health, economic, and confinement-induced hardships and
12   suffering, mostly for the poor, and reset habits and everyday behaviours of the well-off too, enabling a
13   reflection on the basic needs for a good life. Although COVID-19 and climate change pose different
14   kinds of threats and therefore elicit different policies, there are several lessons from COVID-19 for
15   advancing climate change mitigation (Klenert et al. 2020; Manzanedo and Manning 2020; Stark 2020).
16   Both crises are global in scale, requiring holistic societal response; governments can act rapidly, and
17   delay in action is costly (Bouman et al. 2020a; Klenert et al. 2020). The pandemic highlighted the role
18   of individuals in collective action and many people felt morally compelled and responsible to act for
19   others (Budd and Ison, 2020). COVID-19 also taught the effectiveness of rapid collective action
20   (physical distancing, wearing masks, etc.) as contributions to the public good. The messaging about
21   social distancing, wearing masks and handwashing during the pandemic called attention to the
22   importance of effective public information (e.g. also about reducing personal carbon footprints),
23   recognising that rapid pro-social responses are driven by personal and socio-cultural norms (Sovacool
24   et al. 2020a; Bouman et al. 2020a). In contrast, low trust in public authorities impairs the effectiveness
25   of policies and polarizes society (Bavel et al. 2020; Hornsey 2020).
26
27   During the shutdown, emissions declined relatively most in aviation, and absolutely most in car
28   transport (Le Quéré et al. 2020, Sarkis et al. 2020), and there were disproportionally strong reductions
29   in GHG emissions from coal (Bertram et al. 2021)(Chapter 2). At their peak, CO2 emissions in
30   individual countries decreased by 17% in average (Le Quéré et al. 2020). Global energy demand was
31   projected to drop by 5% in 2020, energy-related CO2 emissions by 7%, and energy investment by 18%
32   (IEA 2020a). Covid-19 shock and recovery scenarios project final energy demand reductions of 1–36
33   EJ yr−1 by 2025 and cumulative CO2 emission reductions of 14–45 GtCO2 by 2030 (Kikstra et al.
34   2021a). Plastics use and waste generation increased during the pandemic (Klemeš et al. 2020; Prata et
35   al. 2020). Responses to COVID-19 had important connections with energy demand and GHG emissions
36   due to quarantine and travel restrictions (Sovacool et al. 2020a). Reductions in mobility and economic
37   activity reduced energy use in sectors such as industry and transport, but increased energy use in the
38   residential sector (Diffenbaugh et al. 2020). COVID-19 induced behavioural changes that may translate
39   into new habits, some beneficial and some harmful for climate change mitigation. New digitally enabled
40   service accessibility patterns (videoconferencing, telecommuting) played an important role in
41   sustaining various service needs while avoiding demand for individual mobility. However, public transit
42   lost customers to cars, personalised two wheelers, walking and cycling, while suburban and rural living
43   gained popularity, possibly with long-term consequences. Reduced air travel, pressures for more
44   localised food and manufacturing supply chains (Hobbs 2020; Nandi et al. 2020; Quayson et al. 2020),
45   and governments’ revealed willingness to make large-scale interventions in the economy also reflect
46   sudden shifts in service provisions and GHG emissions, some likely to be lasting (Aldaco et al. 2020;
47   Bilal et al. 2020; Boyer 2020; Norouzi et al. 2020; Prideaux et al. 2020; Hepburn et al. 2020; Sovacool
48   et al. 2020a). If changes in some preference behaviours, e.g. for larger homes and work environments
49   to enable home working and online education, lead to sprawling suburbs or gentrification with linked



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-13                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   environmental consequences, this could translate into long-term implications for climate change
 2   (Beaunoyer et al. 2020; Diffenbaugh et al. 2020). Recovering from the pandemic by adopting low
 3   energy demand practices – embedded in new travel, work, consumption and production behaviour and
 4   patterns– could reduce carbon prices for a 1.5°C consistent pathway by 19%, reduce energy supply
 5   investments until 2030 by 1.8 trillion USD, and lessen pressure on the upscaling of low-carbon energy
 6   technologies (Kikstra et al. 2021a).
 7
 8   COVID-19 drove hundreds of millions of people below poverty thresholds, reversing decades of
 9   poverty reduction accomplishments (Krieger 2020; Mahler et al. 2020; Patel et al. 2020; Sumner et al.
10   2020) and raising the spectre of intersecting health and climate crises that are devastating for the most
11   vulnerable (Flyvbjerg 2020; Phillips et al. 2020). Like those of climate change, pandemic impacts fall
12   heavily on disadvantaged groups, exacerbate the uneven distribution of future benefits, amplify existing
13   inequities, and introduce new ones (Devine-Wright et al. 2020; Beaunoyer et al. 2020). Addressing such
14   inequities is a positive step towards the social trust that leads to improved climate policies as well as
15   individual actions. Increased support for care workers and social infrastructures within a solidarity
16   economy is consistent with lower-emission economic transformation (Shelley 2017; Di Chiro 2019;
17   Pichler et al. 2019; Smetschka et al. 2019).
18
19   Fiscally, the pandemic may have slowed the transition to a sustainable energy world: governments
20   redistributed public funding to combat the disease, adopted austerity and reduced capacity, i.e. among
21   nearly 300 policies implemented to counteract the pandemic, the vast majority are related to rescue,
22   including worker and business compensation, and only 4% of these focus on green policies with
23   potential to reduce GHG emissions in the long-term; some rescue policies also assist emissions-
24   intensive business (Leach et al. 2021; Hepburn et al. 2020). However, climate investments can double
25   as the basis of the COVID-19 recovery (Stark 2020), with policies focused on both economic multipliers
26   and climate impacts such as clean physical infrastructure, natural capital investment, clean R&D and
27   education and training (Hepburn et al. 2020). This requires attention to investment priorities, including
28   often-underprioritized social investment, given how inequality intersects with and is a recognised core
29   driver of environmental damage and climate change (Millward-Hopkins et al. 2020).
30
31   END BOX 5.2 HERE
32
33   5.2 Services, well-being and equity in demand-side mitigation
34   As outlined in section 5.1, mitigation, equity and well-being go hand in hand to motivate actions.
35   Global, regional, and national actions/policies that advance inclusive well-being and build social trust
36   strengthen governance. There is high evidence and high agreement that demand-side measures cut
37   across all sectors, and can bring multiple benefits (Mundaca et al. 2019; Wachsmuth and Duscha 2019;
38   Geels 2020; Niamir et al. 2020b; Garvey et al. 2021; Roy et al. 2021). Since effective demand requires
39   affordability, one of the necessary conditions for acceleration of mitigation through demand side
40   measures is wide and equitable participation from all sectors of society. Low-cost low-emissions
41   technologies, supported by institutions and government policies, can help meet service demand and
42   advance both climate and well-being goals (Steffen et al. 2018a; Khosla et al. 2019). This section
43   introduces metrics of well-being and their relationship to GHG emissions, and clarifies the concept of
44   service provisioning.

45   5.2.1 Metrics of well-being and their relationship to GHG emissions
46   There is high evidence and agreement in the literature that human well-being and related metrics
47   provide a societal perspective which is inclusive, compatible with sustainable development, and



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-14                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   generates multiple ways to mitigate emissions. Development targeted to basic needs and well-being for
 2   all entails less carbon-intensity than GDP-focused growth (Rao et al. 2014; Lamb and Rao 2015).
 3
 4   Current socioeconomic systems are based on high-carbon economic growth and resource use (Steffen
 5   et al. 2018b). Several systematic reviews confirm that economic growth is tightly coupled with
 6   increasing CO2 emissions (Ayres and Warr 2005; Tiba and Omri 2017; Mardani et al. 2019;
 7   Wiedenhofer et al. 2020) although the level of emissions depends on inequality (Baležentis et al. 2020;
 8   Liu et al. 2020b), and on geographic and infrastructural constraints that force consumers to use fossil
 9   fuels (Pottier et al. 2021). Different patterns emerge in the causality of the energy-growth nexus; (i)
10   energy consumption causes economic growth; (ii) growth causes energy consumption; (iii)
11   bidirectional causality; and (iv) no significant causality (Ozturk 2010). In a systematic review, Mardani
12   et al. (Mardani et al. 2019) found that in most cases energy use and economic growth have a
13   bidirectional causal effect, indicating that as economic growth increases, further CO2 emissions are
14   stimulated at higher levels; in turn, measures designed to lower GHG emissions may reduce economic
15   growth. However, energy substitution and efficiency gains may offer opportunities to break the
16   bidirectional dependency (Komiyama 2014; Brockway et al. 2017; Shuai et al. 2019). Worldwide trends
17   reveal that at best only relative decoupling (resource use grows at a slower pace than GDP) was the
18   norm during the twentieth century (Jackson 2009; Krausmann et al. 2009; Ward et al. 2016; Jackson
19   2017), while absolute decoupling (when material use declines as GDP grows) is rare, observed only
20   during recessions or periods of low or no economic growth (Heun and Brockway 2019; Hickel and
21   Kallis 2019; Vadén et al. 2020; Wiedenhofer et al. 2020). Recent trends in OECD countries demonstrate
22   the potential for absolute decoupling of economic growth not only from territorial but also from
23   consumption-based emissions (Le Quéré et al. 2019), albeit at scales insufficient for mitigation
24   pathways (Vadén et al. 2020) (Chapter 2).
25
26   Energy demand and demand for GHG intensive products increased from 2010 until 2020 across all
27   sectors and categories. 2019 witnessed a reduction in energy demand growth rate to below 1% and 2020
28   an overall decline in energy demand, with repercussions into energy supply disproportionally affecting
29   coal via merit order effects (Bertram et al. 2021) (Cross-Chapter Box 1 in Chapter 1). There was a slight
30   but significant shift from high carbon beef consumption to medium carbon intensive poultry
31   consumption. Final energy use in buildings grew from 118 EJ in 2010 to around 128 EJ in 2019
32   (increased about 8%). The highest increase was observed in non-residential buildings, with a 13%
33   increase against 8% in residential energy demand (IEA 2019a). While electricity accounted for one-
34   third of building energy use in 2019, fossil fuel use also increased at a marginal annual average growth
35   rate of 0.7% since 2010 (IEA 2020a). Energy-related CO2 emissions from buildings have risen in recent
36   years after flattening between 2013 and 2016. Direct and indirect emissions from electricity and
37   commercial heat used in buildings rose to 10 GtCO2 in 2019, the highest level ever recorded. Several
38   factors have contributed to this rise, including growing energy demand for heating and cooling with
39   rising air-conditioner ownership and extreme weather events. A critical issue remains for how
40   comfortable people feel with temperatures they will be exposed to in the future and this depends on
41   factors such as physical, psychological and behavioral (Singh et al. 2018; Jacobs et al. 2019). Literature
42   now shows high evidence and high agreement around the observation that policies and infrastructure
43   interventions that lead to change in human preferences are more valuable for climate change mitigation.
44   In economics, welfare evaluations are predominantly based on the preference approach. Preferences are
45   typically assumed to be fixed, so that only changes in relative prices will reduce emissions. However,
46   as decarbonisation is a societal transition, individuals’ preferences do shift and this can contribute to
47   climate change mitigation (Gough 2015). Even if preferences are assumed to change in response to
48   policy, it is nevertheless possible to evaluate policy, and demand-side solutions, by approaches to well-
49   being/welfare that are based on deeper concepts of preferences across disciplines (Fleurbaey and
50   Tadenuma 2014; Dietrich and List 2016; Mattauch and Hepburn 2016; Roy and Pal 2009; Komiyama


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-15                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   2014). In cases of past societal transitions, such as smoking reduction, there is evidence that societies
 2   guided the processes of shifting preferences, and values changed along with changing relative prices
 3   (Nyborg and Rege 2003; Stuber et al. 2008; Brownell and Warner 2009). Further evidence on changing
 4   preferences in consumption choices pertinent to decarbonisation includes (Grinblatt et al. 2008;
 5   Weinberger and Goetzke 2010) for mobility; (Erb et al. 2016; Muller et al. 2017; Costa and Johnson
 6   2019) for diets; (Baranzini et al. 2017) for solar panel uptake. If individuals’ preferences and values
 7   change during a transition to the low-carbon economy, then this overturns conclusions on what count
 8   as adequate or even optimal policy responses to climate change mitigation in economics (Jacobsen et
 9   al. 2012; Schumacher 2015; Dasgupta et al. 2016; Daube and Ulph 2016; Ulph and Ulph 2021). In
10   particular, if policy instruments, such as awareness campaigns, infrastructure development or education,
11   can change people’s preferences, then policies or infrastructure provision – socially constrained by
12   deliberative decision making -- which change both relative prices and preferences, are more valuable
13   for mitigation than previously thought (Mattauch et al. 2016, 2018; Creutzig et al. 2016b). The
14   provisioning context of human needs is participatory, so transformative mitigation potential arises from
15   social as well as technological change (Lamb and Steinberger 2017). Many dimensions of well-being
16   and ‘basic needs’ are social not individual in character (Schneider 2016), so extending well-being and
17   DLS analysis to emissions also involves understanding individual situations in social contexts. This
18   includes building supports for collective strategies to reduce emissions (Chan et al. 2019), going beyond
19   individual consumer choice. Climate policies that affect collective behaviour fairly are the most
20   acceptable policies across political ideologies (Clayton 2018); thus collective preferences for mitigation
21   are synergistic with evolving policies and norms in governance contexts that reduce risk, ensure social
22   justice and build trust (Atkinson et al. 2017; Cramton et al. 2017; Milkoreit 2017; Tvinnereim et al.
23   2017; Smith and Reid 2018; Carattini et al. 2019).
24
25   Because of data limitations, which can make cross-country comparisons difficult, health-based
26   indicators and in particular life expectancy (Lamb et al. 2014) have sometimes been proposed as quick
27   and practical ways to compare local or national situations, climate impacts, and policy effects (Decancq
28   et al. 2009; Sager 2017; Burstein et al. 2019). A number of different well-being metrics are valuable in
29   emphasising the constituents of what is needed for a decent life in different dimensions (Porter et al.
30   2017; Smith and Reid 2018; Lamb and Steinberger 2017). The SDGs overlap in many ways with such
31   indicators, and the data needed to assess progress in meeting the SDGs is also useful for quantifying
32   well-being (Gough 2017). For the purposes of this chapter, indicators directly relating GHG emissions
33   to well-being for all are particularly relevant.
34
35   Well-being can be categorised either as “hedonic” or “eudaimonic”. Hedonic well-being is related to a
36   subjective state of human motivation, balancing pleasure over pain, and has gained influence in
37   psychology assessing ‘subjective well-being’ such as happiness and minimising pain, assuming that the
38   individual is motivated to enhance personal freedom, self-preservation and enhancement (Sirgy 2012;
39   Ganglmair-Wooliscroft and Wooliscroft 2019; Brand-Correa and Steinberger 2017; Lamb and
40   Steinberger 2017). Eudaimonic well-being focuses on the individual in the broader context, associating
41   happiness with virtue (Sirgy 2012) allowing for social institutions and political systems and considering
42   their ability to enable individuals to flourish. Eudaimonic analysis supports numerous development
43   approaches (Fanning and O’Neill 2019) such as the capabilities (Sen 1985), human needs (Doyal and
44   Gough 1991; Max-Neef et al. 1991) and models of psychosocial well-being (Ryan and Deci 2001).
45   Measures of well-being differ somewhat in developed and developing countries (Sulemana et al. 2016;
46   Ng and Diener 2019); for example, food insecurity, associated everywhere with lower subjective well-
47   being, is more strongly associated with poor subjective well-being in more-developed countries
48   (Frongillo et al. 2019); in wealthier countries, the relationship between living in rural areas is less
49   strongly associated with negative well-being than in less-developed countries (Requena 2016); and
50   income inequality is negatively associated with subjective well-being in developed countries, but


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-16                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                    Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   positively so in less-developed countries (Ngamaba et al. 2018). This chapter connects demand side
 2   climate mitigation options to multiple dimensions of well-being going beyond single dimensional
 3   metric of GDP which is at the core of IAMs. Many demand side mitigation solutions generate positive
 4   and negative impacts on wider dimensions of human well-being which are not always quantifiable
 5   (medium evidence, medium agreement).
 6
 7   5.2.1.1    Services for well-being
 8   Well-being needs are met through services. Provision of services associated with low-energy demand
 9   is a key component of current and future efforts to reduce carbon emissions. Services can be provided
10   in various culturally-appropriate ways, with diverse climate implications. There is high evidence and
11   high agreement in the literature that many granular service provision systems can make ‘demand’ more
12   flexible, provide new options for mitigation, support access to basic needs, and enhance human well-
13   being. Energy services offer an important lens to analyse the relationship between energy systems and
14   human well-being (Jackson and Papathanasopoulou 2008; Druckman and Jackson 2010; Mattioli 2016;
15   Walker et al. 2016; Fell 2017; Brand-Correa et al. 2018; King et al. 2019; Pagliano and Erba 2019;
16   Whiting et al. 2020). Direct and indirect services provided by energy, rather than energy itself, deliver
17   well-being benefits (Kalt et al. 2019). For example, illumination and transport are intermediary services
18   in relation to education, healthcare, meal preparation, sanitation, etc. which are basic human needs.
19   Sustainable consumption and production revolve around ‘doing more and better with the same ’ and
20   thereby increasing well-being from economic activities ‘by reducing resource use, degradation and
21   pollution along the whole lifecycle, while increasing quality of life’ (UNEP 2010). Although energy is
22   required for delivering human development by supporting access to basic needs (Lamb and Rao 2015;
23   Lamb and Steinberger 2017), a reduction in primary energy use and/or shift to low-carbon energy, if
24   associated with the maintenance or improvement of services, can not only ensure better environmental
25   quality but also directly enhance well-being (Roy et al. 2012) the correlation between human
26   development and emissions are not necessarily coupled in the long term, which implies prioritize human
27   well-being and the environment over economic growth (Steinberger et al. 2020). At the interpersonal
28   and community level, cultural specificities, infrastructure, norms, and relational behaviours differ. (Box
29   5.3). For example, demand for space heating and cooling depends on building materials and designs,
30   urban planning, vegetation, clothing and social norms as well as geography, incomes, and outside
31   temperatures (Campbell et al. 2018; Ivanova et al. 2018; IEA 2019b; Dreyfus et al. 2020; Brand-Correa
32   et al. 2018). In personal mobility, different variable needs satisfiers (e.g., street space allocated to cars,
33   bussesor bicycles) can help satisfy human needs, such as accessibility to jobs, health care, and
34   education. Social interactions and normative values play a crucial role in determining energy demand.
35   Hence, demand-side and service-oriented mitigation strategies are most effective if geographically and
36   culturally differentiated (Niamir et al. 2020a).
37
38   Decent Living Standards (DLS) serves as a socio-economic benchmark as it views human welfare not
39   in relation to consumption but rather in terms of services which together help meet human needs (e.g.
40   nutrition, shelter, health, etc.), recognising that these service needs may be met in many different ways
41   (with different emissions implications) depending on local contexts, cultures, geography, available
42   technologies, social preferences, and other factors. Therefore, one key way of thinking about providing
43   well-being for all with low carbon emissions centres around prioritising ways of providing services for
44   DLS in a low-carbon way (including choices of needs satisfiers, and how these are provided or made
45   accessible). They may be supplied to individuals or groups / communities, both through formal markets
46   and/or informally, e.g. by collaborative work, in coordinated ways that are locally-appropriate, designed
47   and implemented in accordance with overlapping local needs.
48   The most pressing DLS service shortfalls, as shown in Figure 5.2, lie in the areas of nutrition, mobility,
49   and communication. Gaps in regions such as Africa and the Middle East are accompanied by current
50   levels of service provision in the highly industrialised countries at much higher than DLS levels for the


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-17                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   same three service categories. The lowest population quartile by income worldwide faces glaring
 2   shortfalls in housing, mobility, and nutrition. Meeting these service needs using low-emissions energy
 3   sources is a top priority. Reducing GHG emissions associated with high levels of consumption and
 4   material throughput by those far above DLS levels has potential to address both emissions and
 5   inequality in energy and emission footprints (Otto et al. 2019). This, in turn, has further potential
 6   benefits; under the conditions of ‘fair’ income reallocation public services, this can reduce national
 7   carbon footprint by up to 30% while allowing the consumption of those at the bottom to increase
 8   (Millward-Hopkins and Oswald 2021). The challenge then is to address the upper limits of
 9   consumption. When consumption supports the satisfaction of basic needs any decrease causes
10   deficiencies in human-need satisfaction, contrary, in the case of consumption that exceeds the limits of
11   basic needs. A deprivation causes a subjective discomfort (Brand-Correa et al. 2020) therefore,
12   establishing minimum and maximum standards of consumption or sustainable consumption corridors
13   (Wiedmann et al. 2020) has been suggested to collectively not surpassing the environmental limits
14   depending on the context. In some countries, carbon intensive ways of satisfying human needs have
15   been locked-in, e.g. via car-dependent infrastructures (Druckman and Jackson 2010; Jackson and
16   Papathanasopoulou 2008; King et al. 2019; Mattioli 2016), and both infrastructure reconfiguration and
17   adaptation are required to organise need satisfaction in low-carbon ways (see also Section 10.2 in
18   Chapter 10).
19




20




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-18                                Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                     Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   Figure 5.2 2 Heterogeneity in access to and availability of services for human well-being within and across
 2                                                      countries.
 3     Panel A. Across –country differences in panel (a) food-meat, (b)food other, (c) housing, (d) mobility, (e)
 4       Communication –mobile phones, and (f) high speed internet access. Variation in service levels across
 5    countries within a region are shown as error bars (black). Values proposed as decent standards of living
 6    threshold (Rao et al. 2019b) are shown (red dashed lines). Global average values are shown (blue dashed
 7      lines). Panel B. Within-country differences in service levels as a function of income differences for the
 8   Netherlands (bottom and top 10% of incomes) and India (bottom and top 25% of incomes) (Grubler et al.
 9    2012b) (data update 2016). Panel C. Decent living energy (DLE) scenario using global, regional and DLS
10   dimensions for final energy consumption at 149 EJ (15.3 GJ capita -1yr-1) in 2050 (Millward-Hopkins et al.
11   2020), requiring advanced technologies in all sectors and radical demand-side changes. Values are shown
12   for 5 world regions based on WG III AR6 Regional breakdown. Here we use passenger km/day/capita as
13    metric for mobility only as a reference, however, transport and social inclusion research suggest the aim
14                       is to maximize accessibility and not travel levels or travelled distance.
15
16   There is high evidence and high agreement in the literature that vital dimensions of human well-being
17   correlate with consumption, but only up to a threshold. High potential for mitigation lies in using low-
18   carbon energy for new basic needs satisfaction while cutting emissions of those whose basic needs are
19   already met (Grubler et al. 2018; Rao and Min 2018b; Millward-Hopkins et al. 2020; Rao et al. 2019b;
20   Keyßer and Lenzen 2021). Decent Living Standards indicators serve as tools to clarify this socio-
21   economic benchmark and identify well-being for all compatible mitigation potential. Energy services
22   provisioning opens up avenues of efficiency and possibilities for decoupling energy services demand
23   from primary energy supply, while needs satisfaction leads to the analysis of the factors influencing the
24   energy demand associated with the achievement of well-being (Brand-Correa and Steinberger 2017;
25   Tanikawa et al. 2021). Vital dimensions of well-being correlate with consumption, but only up to a
26   threshold, decent living energy thresholds range ~13–18.4 GJ-1cap-1yr of final energy consumption but
27   the current consumption ranges from under 5 GJ-1cap-1yr to over 200 GJ-1cap-1yr (Millward-Hopkins et
28   al. 2020), thus a mitigation strategy that protects minimum levels of essential-goods service delivery
29   for DLS, but critically views consumption beyond the point of diminishing returns of needs satisfaction,
30   is able to sustain well-being while generating emissions reductions (Goldemberg et al. 1988; Jackson
31   and Marks 1999; Druckman and Jackson 2010; Girod and De Haan 2010; Vita et al. 2019a;
32   Baltruszewicz et al. 2021). Such relational dynamics are relevant both within and between countries,
33   due to variances in income levels, lifestyle choice (see also 5.4.4), geography, resource assets and local
34   contexts. Provisioning for human needs is recognised as participatory and interrelational; transformative
35   mitigation potential can be found in social as well as technological change (Mazur and Rosa 1974;
36   Goldemberg et al. 1985; Hayward and Roy 2019; Lamb and Steinberger 2017; O’Neill et al. 2018; Vita
37   et al. 2019a). More equitable societies which provide DLS for all can devote attention and resources to
38   mitigation (Dubash 2013; Rafaty 2018; Richards 2003; Oswald et al. 2021). For further exploration of
39   these concepts, see the Chapter 5 Supplementary Material I.
40
41   5.2.2 Inequity in access to basic energy use and services
42
43   5.2.2.1   Variations in access to needs-satisfiers for Decent Living Standards
44   There is very high evidence and very high agreement that globally, there are differences in the amount
45   of energy that societies require to provide the basic needs for everyone. At present nearly one-third of
46   the world’s population are ‘energy-poor’ facing challenges in both access and affordability, i.e., more
47   than 2.6 billion people have little or no access to energy for clean cooking. About 1.2 billion lack energy
48   for cleaning, sanitation and water supply, lighting, and basic livelihood tasks (Sovacool and Drupady
49   2016; Rao and Pachauri 2017).The current per capita energy requirement to provide a decent standard

     FOOTNOTE 2 The countries and areas classification in this figure deviate from the standard classification scheme
     adopted by WGIII as set out in Annex II, section 1.



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                     5-19                                   Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   of living range from ~5 to 200 GJ cap-1yr-1 (Steckel et al. 2013; Lamb and Steinberger 2017; Rao et al.
 2   2019b; Millward-Hopkins et al. 2020), which shows the level of inequality that exists; this depends on
 3   the context such as geography, culture, infrastructure or how services are provided (Brand-Correa et al.
 4   2018) (Box 5.3). However, through efficient technologies and radical demand-side transformations, the
 5   final energy requirements for providing DLS by 2050 is estimated at 15.3 GJ cap -1yr-1 (Millward-
 6   Hopkins et al. 2020). Recent DLS estimates for Brazil, South Africa, and India are in the range between
 7   15 and 25 GJ cap-1yr-1 (Rao et al. 2019b).The most gravely energy-poor are often those living in informal
 8   settlements, particularly women who live in sub-Saharan Africa and developing Asia, whose socially-
 9   determined responsibilities for food, water, and care are highly labour-intensive and made more intense
10   by climate change (Guruswamy 2016; Wester et al. 2019). For example, in Brazil, India and South
11   Africa, where inequality is extreme (Alvaredo et al. 2018) mobility (51-60%), food production and
12   preparation (21-27%) and housing (5-12%) dominate total energy needs (Rao et al. 2019b). Minimum
13   requirements of energy use consistent with enabling well-being for all is between 20 and 50 GJ cap-1
14   yr-1 depending on context (Rao et al. 2019b). Inequality in access to and availability of services for
15   human well-being varies in extreme degree across countries and income groups. In developing countries
16   the bottom 50% receive about 10% of the energy used in land transport and less than 5% in air transport,
17   while the top 10% use ~45% of the energy for land transport and around 75% for air transport (Oswald
18   et al. 2020). Within-country analysis shows that particular groups in China— women born in the rural
19   West with disadvantaged family backgrounds— face unequal opportunities for energy consumption
20   (Shi 2019). Figure 5.3 shows the wide variation across world regions in people’s access to some of the
21   basic material prerequisites for meeting DLS, and variations in energy consumption, providing a
22   starting point for comparative global analysis.




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-20                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII




 1
 2
 3    Figure 5.3 Energy use per capita of three groups of countries ranked by socioeconomic development and
 4   displayed for each country based on four or five different income groups (according the data availability)
 5   as well as geographical representation. The final energy use for decent living standards (20-50 GJ cap-1) is
 6    indicated in the blue column (Rao et al. 2019b) as a reference for global range, rather than dependent on
 7                                                 each country .
 8                                       Data based on (Oswald et al. 2020).
 9
10   START BOX 5.3 HERE
11
12     Box 5.3 Inequities in access to and levels of end-use technologies and infrastructure services

13   Acceleration in mitigation action needs to be understood from societal perspective. Technologies,
14   access and service equity factors sometimes change rapidly. Access to technologies, infrastructures and
15   products, and the services they provide, are essential for raising global living standards and improving
16   human well-being (Alkire and Santos 2014; Rao and Min 2018b). Yet access to and levels of service
17   delivery are distributed extremely inequitably as of now. How fast such inequities can be reduced by
18   granular end-use technologies is illustrated by the cellphone (households with mobiles), comparing the



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-21                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   situation between 2014 and 2018. In this eighteen-year period, cellphones changed from a very
 2   inequitably-distributed technology to one with almost universal access, bringing accessibility benefits
 3   especially to populations with very low disposable income and to those whose physical mobility is
 4   limited (Porter 2016). Every human has the right to dignified decent life, to live in good health and to
 5   participate in society. This is a daunting challenge, requiring that in the next decade governments build
 6   out infrastructure to provide billions of people with access to a number of services and basic amenities
 7   in comfortable homes, nutritious food, and transit options (Rao and Min 2018b). For long, this challenge
 8   was thought to also be an impediment to developing countries’ participation in global climate mitigation
 9   efforts. However, recent research shows that this need not be the case (Millward-Hopkins et al. 2020;
10   Rao et al. 2019b).




11
12
13                Box 5.3, Figure 1 International inequality in access and use of goods and services.
14     Upper panel: International Lorenz curves and Gini coefficients accounting for the share of population
15         living in households without access (origin of the curves on the y-axis), multiple ownership not
16     considered. Lower panel: Gini, number of people without access, access rates and coverage in terms of
17   share of global population and number of countries included. *Reduced samples lead to underestimation
18   of inequality. A sample, for example, of around 80% of world population (taking the same 43 countries as




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-22                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                    Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1     for mobiles and cars) led to a lower Gini of around 0.48 (-0.04) for electricity. The reduced sample was
 2                         kept for mobiles in 2018 to allow for comparability with 2000.
 3                                               Source: (Zimm 2019)
 4
 5   Several of the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) (UN 2015) deal with providing
 6   access to technologies and service infrastructures to the share of population so far excluded, showing
 7   that the UN 2030 Agenda has adopted a multidimensional perspective on poverty. Multidimensional
 8   poverty indices, such as the Social Progress Indicator (SPI) and the Individual Deprivation Measure, go
 9   beyond income and focus on tracking the delivery of access to basic services by the poorest population
10   groups, both in developing countries (Fulton et al. 2009; Alkire and Robles 2017; Alkire and Santos
11   2014; Rao and Min 2018b), and in developed countries (Townsend 1979; Aaberge and Brandolini 2015;
12   Eurostat 2018). At the same time, the SDGs, primarily SDG 10 on reducing inequalities within and
13   among countries, promote a more equitable world, both in terms of inter- as well as intra-national
14   equality.
15   Access to various end-use technologies and infrastructure services features directly in the SDG targets
16   and among the indicators used to track their progress (UNESC 2017; UN 2015): Basic services in
17   households (SDG 1.4.1), Improved water source (SDG 6.1.1); Improved sanitation (SDG 6.1.2);
18   Electricity (SDG 7.1.1); Internet - fixed broadband subscriptions (SDG 17.6.2); Internet - proportion of
19   population (SDG 17.8.1). Transport (public transit, cars, mopeds or bicycles) and media technologies
20   (mobile phones, TVs, radios, PCs, Internet) can be seen as proxies for access to mobility and
21   communication, crucial for participation in society and the economy (Smith et al. 2015). In addition,
22   SDG 10 is a more conventional income-based inequality goal, referring to income inequality (SDG
23   10.1), social, economic and political inclusion of all (SDG 10.2.), and equal opportunities and reduced
24   inequalities of outcome (SDG 10.3).
25
26   END BOX 5.3 HERE
27   5.2.2.2   Variations in energy use
28   There is high evidence and high agreement in the literature that through equitable distribution, well-
29   being for all can be assured at the lowest-possible energy consumption levels (Steinberger and Roberts
30   2010; Oswald et al. 2020) by reducing emissions related to consumption as much as possible, while
31   assuring DLS for everyone (Annecke 2002; de Zoysa 2011; Ehrlich and Ehrlich 2013; Spangenberg
32   2014; Toroitich and Kerber 2014; Dario Kenner 2015; Smil 2017; Toth and Szigeti 2016; Otto et al.
33   2019; Baltruszewicz et al. 2021). For example, at similar levels of human development, per capita
34   energy demand in the US was 63% higher than in Germany (Arto et al. 2016); those patterns are
35   explained by context in terms of various climate, cultural and historical factors influencing consumption
36   Context matter even in within country analysis ,e.g. electricity consumption in US show that efficiency
37   innovations do exert positive influence on savings of residential energy consumption, but the
38   relationship is mixed; on the contrary, affluence (household income and home size) and context
39   (geographical location) drives significantly resource utilization (Adua and Clark 2019), affluence is
40   central to any future prospect in terms of environmental conditions (Wiedmann et al. 2020). In China,
41   inequality of energy consumption and expenditure varies highly depending on the energy type, end-use
42   demand and climatic region (Wu et al. 2017).
43   Consumption is energy and materials-intensive and expands along with income. About half of the
44   energy used in the world is consumed by the richest 10% of people, most of whom live in developed
45   countries, especially when one includes the energy embodied in the goods they purchase from other
46   countries and the structure of consumption as a function of income level (Wolfram et al. 2016; Arto et
47   al. 2016; Santillán Vera et al. 2021). International trade plays a central tole being responsible for shifting
48   burdens in most cases from low-income developing countries producers to high income developed
49   countries as consumers (Wiedmann et al. 2020). China is the largest importing market for EU and
50   United States, which accounts for near half and 40% of their imports in energy use respectively (Wu et


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-23                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   al. 2019). Wealthy countries have exported or outsourced their climate and energy crisis to low and
 2   middle-income countries (Baker 2018) exacerbated by intensive international trade (Steinberger et al.
 3   2012; Scherer et al. 2018). Therefore, issues of total energy consumption are inseparably related to the
 4   energy inequity among the countries and regions of the world.
 5
 6   Within the energy use induced by global consumer products, household consumption is the biggest
 7   contributor, contributing to around three quarters of the global total (Wu et al. 2019). A more granular
 8   analysis of household energy consumption reveals that the lowest two quintiles in countries with
 9   average annual income below 15,000 USD cap-1 consume less energy than the international energy
10   requirements for DLS (20-50 GJ cap-1); 77% of people consume less than 30 GJ cap-1yr-1 and 38%
11   consume less than 10 GJ cap-1yr-1 (Oswald et al. 2020). Many energy-intensive goods have high price
12   elasticity (>1.0), implying that growing incomes lead to over-proportional growth of energy footprints
13   in these consumption categories. Highly unequally distributed energy consumption is concentrated in
14   the transport sector, ranging from vehicle purchase to fuels, and most unequally in package holidays
15   and aviation (Gössling 2019; Oswald et al. 2020).
16
17   Socio-economic dynamics and outcomes affect whether provisioning of goods and services is achieved
18   at low energy demand levels (Figure 5.4). Specifically, multivariate regression shows that public service
19   quality, income equality, democracy, and electricity access enable higher need satisfaction at lower
20   energy demand, whereas extractivism and economic growth beyond moderate levels of affluence are
21   reduce need satisfaction at higher energy demand (Vogel et al. 2021). Altogether this demonstrates that
22   at a given level of energy provided, there is large scope to improve service levels for well-being by
23   modifying social economic context without increasing energy supply (Figure 5.4).
24




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-24                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII




 1
 2
 3    Figure 5.4 Improving services for well-being is possible, often at huge margin, at a given (relatively low)
 4                                               level of energy use
 5                                           Source:(Vogel et al. 2021)
 6
 7   5.2.2.3   Variations in consumption-based emissions
 8   The carbon footprint of a nation is equal to the direct emissions occurring due to households’ transport,
 9   heating and cooking, as well as the impact embodied in the production of all consumed goods and
10   services (Wiedmann and Minx 2008; Davis and Caldeira 2010; Hübler 2017; Vita et al. 2019a). There
11   are large differences in carbon footprints between the poor and the rich. As a result of energy use
12   inequality, the lowest global emitters (the poorest 10% in developing countries) in 2013 emitted about
13   0.1t CO2 cap-1, whereas the highest global emitters (the top 1% in the richest countries) emitted about
14   200-300 tCO2 cap-1 (World Bank 2019), . The poorest 50% of the world’s population are responsible
15   for only about 10% of total lifetime consumption emissions, in contrast about ~50% of the world’s
16   GHG emissions can be attributed to consumption by the world’s richest 10%, with the average carbon
17   footprint of the richest being 175 times higher than that of the poorest 10% (Chancel and Piketty 2015)
18   consuming the global carbon budget by nearly 30% during the period 1990-2015 (Kartha et al. 2020;
19   Gore 2020). While the mitigation efforts often focus on the poorest, the lifestyle and consumption
20   patterns of the affluent people often influence the growing middle class (Otto et al. 2019), e.g. Across


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-25                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   EU countries, only 5% of households are living within the 1.5% climate limits and the top 1% emit
 2   more than 22 times the target on average, being the transport in both land and air a characteristic of the
 3   highest emitters (Ivanova and Wood 2020).
 4
 5   In low-income nations-which can exhibit per-capita carbon footprints 30 times lower than wealthy
 6   nations (Hertwich and Peters 2009) emissions are predominantly domestic and driven by provision of
 7   essential services (shelter, low-meat diets, clothing). Per capita carbon footprints average 1.6 tonnes per
 8   year for the lowest income category, then quickly increase to 4.9 and 9.8 tonne for the two middle-
 9   income categories and finally to an average of 17.9 tonnes for the highest income category. Global CO2
10   emissions remain concentrated: the top 10% of emitters contribute about 35-45% of the total, while the
11   bottom 50% contribute just 13-15% of global emissions (Hubacek et al. 2017; Chancel and Piketty
12   2015). In wealthy nations, services such as private road transport, frequent air travel, private jet
13   ownership, meat-intensive diets, entertainment and leisure add significant emissions, while a
14   considerable fraction of the carbon footprint is imported from abroad, embedded in goods and services
15   (Hubacek et al. 2017).
16
17   High income households consume and demand energy at an order of magnitude greater than what is
18   necessary for DLS (Oswald et al. 2020). Energy-intensive goods, such as package holidays, have a
19   higher income elasticity of demand than less energy-intensive goods like food, water supply and
20   housing maintenance, which results in high-income individuals having much higher energy footprints
21   (Oswald et al. 2020). Evidence highlights highly unequal GHG emission in aviation: only 2-4% of
22   global population flew internationally in 2018, with 1% of world population emitting 50% of CO2 from
23   commercial aviation (Gössling and Humpe 2020). Some individuals may add more than 1,600 t CO2 yr-
     1
24     individually by air travel (Gössling 2019).
25
26   The food sector dominates in all income groups, comprising 28% of households’ carbon footprint, with
27   cattle and rice the major contributors (Scherer et al. 2018), food also accounts for 48% and 70% of
28   household impacts on land and water resources, being the meat, dairy, and processed food rising fast
29   together with income (Ivanova et al. 2016). Roughly 20-40% of food produced worldwide is lost to
30   waste before it reaches the market, or is wasted by households, the energy embodied in wasted food
31   was estimated at ~36 EJyr-1, and during the period 2010-2016 global food loss and waste equalled 8-
32   10% of total GHG emissions (Godfray and Garnett 2014; Springmann et al. 2018; Mbow et al. 2019).
33   Global agri-food supply chains are crucial in the variation of per capita food consumption-related-GHG
34   footprints, mainly in the case of red meat and dairy (Kim et al. 2020) since highest per capita food-
35   consumption-related GHG emissions do not correlate perfectly with the income status of countries.
36   Thus, it is also crucial to focus on high-emitting individuals and groups within countries, rather than
37   only those who live in high-emitting countries, since the top 10% of emitters live on all continents and
38   one third of them are from the developing world (Chakravarty et al. 2009; Pan et al. 2019).
39
40   The environmental impact of increasing equity across income groups can be either positive or negative
41   (Hubacek et al. 2017; Scherer et al. 2018; Rao and Min 2018a; Millward-Hopkins et al. 2020).
42   Projections for achieving equitable levels of service provision globally predict large increases in global
43   GHG emissions and demand for key resources (Blomsma and Brennan 2017), especially in passenger
44   transport, which is predicted to increase nearly three-fold between 2015 and 2050, from 44 trillion to
45   122 trillion passenger-kilometres (OECD 2019a), and associated infrastructure needs, increasing freight
46   (Murray et al. 2017), increasing demand for cooling (IEA 2018), and shifts to carbon-intensive high-
47   meat diets (FAO 2018).
48
49   Increasing incomes for all to attain DLS raises emissions and energy footprints, but only slightly
50   (Jorgenson et al. 2016; Chakravarty et al. 2009; Scherer et al. 2018; Millward-Hopkins et al. 2020;


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-26                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   Oswald et al. 2020, 2021). The amount of energy needed for a high global level of human development
 2   is dropping (Steinberger and Roberts 2010) and could by 2050 be reduced to 1950 levels (Millward-
 3   Hopkins et al. 2020) requiring a massive deployment of technologies across the different sectors as well
 4   as demand-side reduction consumption. The consumption share of the bottom half of the world's
 5   population represents less than 20% of all energy footprints, which is less than what the top 5% of
 6   people consume (Oswald et al. 2020).
 7
 8   Income inequality itself also raises carbon emissions (Hao et al. 2016; Sinha 2016; Uzar and Eyuboglu
 9   2019; Baloch et al. 2020; Wiedmann et al. 2020; Oswald et al. 2020; Vogel et al. 2021). Wide inequality
10   can increase status-based consumption patterns, where individuals spend more to emulate the standards
11   of the high-income group (the Veblenian effect); inequality also diminishes environmental efforts by
12   reducing social cohesion and cooperation (Jorgenson et al. 2017) and finally, inequality also operates
13   by inducing an increase in working hours that leads to higher economic growth and, consequently,
14   higher emissions and ecological footprint, so working time reduction is key for policy to both reduce
15   emissions and protect employment (Fitzgerald et al. 2015, 2018).
16
17   5.2.3 Equity, trust, and participation in demand-side mitigation
18   There is high evidence and high agreement in literature that socio-economic equity builds not only well-
19   being for all, but also trust and effective participatory governance, which in turn strengthen demand-
20   side climate mitigation. Equity, participation, social trust, well-being, governance and mitigation are
21   parts of a continuous interactive and self-reinforcing process (Figure 5.5). Section SM5.1 in the
22   Supplemental Material for this chapter contains more detail on these links, drawing from social science
23   literature.
24
25   Economic growth in equitable societies is associated with lower emissions than in inequitable societies
26   (McGee and Greiner 2018), and income inequality is associated with higher global emissions (Ravallion
27   et al. 1997; Rao and Min 2018c; Diffenbaugh and Burke 2019; Fremstad and Paul 2019; Liu and Hao
28   2020; McGee and Greiner 2018). Relatively slight increases in energy consumption and carbon
29   emissions produce great increases in human development and well-being in less-developed countries,
30   and the amount of energy needed for a high global level of human development is dropping (Steinberger
31   and Roberts 2010). Equitable & democratic societies which provide high quality public services to their
32   population have high well-being outcomes at lower energy use than those which do not, whereas those
33   which prioritize economic growth beyond moderate incomes and extractive sectors display a reversed
34   effect (Vogel et al. 2021).




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-27                                Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII




 1
 2
 3          Figure 5.5 Well-being, equity, trust, governance and climate mitigation: positive feedbacks.
 4      Well-being for all, increasingly seen as the main goal of sustainable economies, reinforces emissions
 5     reductions through a network of positive feedbacks linking effective governance, social trust, equity,
 6   participation and sufficiency. This diagram depicts relationships noted in this chapter text and explained
 7   further in the Social Science Primer (supplementary material I in this Chapter). The width of the arrows
 8      corresponds to the level of confidence and degree of evidence from recent social sciences literature.
 9
10   Well-designed climate mitigation policies ameliorate constituents of well-being (Creutzig et al. 2021b).
11   The study shows that among all demand-side option effects on well-being 79% are positive, 18% are
12   neutral (or not relevant/specify), and only 3% are negative (high confidence) (Creutzig et al. 2021b)
13   (Figure 5.6). Figure 5.6 illustrates active mobility (cycling and walking), efficient buildings and
14   prosumer choices of renewable technologies have the most encompassing beneficial effects on
15   wellbeing with no negative outcome detected. Urban and industry strategies are highly positive overall
16   for wellbeing, but they will also reshape supply-side businesses with transient intermediate negative
17   effects. Shared mobility, like all others, has overall highly beneficial effects on wellbeing, but also
18   displays a few negative consequences, depending on implementation, such as a minor decrease in
19   personal security for patrons of ridesourcing.
20
21   Well-being improvements are most notable in health quality, air, and energy (high confidence). These
22   categories are also most substantiated in the literature, often under the framing of co-benefits. In many
23   cases, co-benefits outweigh the mitigation benefits of specific GHG emission reduction strategies. Food
24   (medium confidence), mobility (high confidence), and water (medium confidence) are further categories
25   where wellbeing is improved. Mobility has entries with highest well-being rankings for teleworking,
26   compact cities, and urban system approaches. Effects on well-being in water and sanitation mostly
27   comes from buildings and urban solutions. Social dimensions, such as personal security, social
28   cohesion, and especially political stability are less predominantly represented. An exception is
29   economic stability, suggesting that demand-side options generate stable opportunities to participate in
30   economic activities (high confidence). Although the relation between demand-side mitigation strategies
31   and the social aspects of human wellbeing is important, this has been less reflected in the literature so
32   far, and hence the assessment finds more neutral/unknown interactions (Figure 5.6).
33



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-28                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   Policies designed to foster higher well-being for all via climate mitigation include reducing emissions
 2   through wider participation in climate action, building more effective governance for improved
 3   mitigation, and including social trust, greater equity, and informal-sector support as integral parts of
 4   climate policies. Public participation facilitates social learning and people’s support of and engagement
 5   with climate change priorities; improved governance is closely tied to effective climate policies
 6   (Phuong et al. 2017). Better education, health care, valuing of social diversity, and reduced poverty –
 7   characteristics of more equal societies–all lead to resilience, innovation, and readiness to adopt
 8   progressive and locally-appropriate mitigation policies, whether high-tech or low-tech, centralised or
 9   decentralised (Tanner et al. 2009; Lorenz 2013; Chu 2015; Cloutier et al. 2015; Mitchell 2015; Martin
10   and Shaheen 2016; Vandeweerdt et al. 2016; Turnheim et al. 2018). Morover, these factors are the ones
11   identified as enablers of high need satisfaction at lower energy use (Vogel et al. 2021).
12
13   There is less policy lock-in in more equitable societies (Seto et al. 2016). International communication,
14   networking, and global connections among citizens are more prevalent in more equitable societies, and
15   these help spread promising mitigation approaches (Scheffran et al. 2012). Climate-related injustices
16   are addressed where equity is prioritised (Klinsky and Winkler 2014). Thus, there is high confidence in
17   the literature that addressing inequities in income, wealth, and DLS not only raises overall well-being
18   and furthers the SDGs but also improves the effectiveness of climate change mitigation policies. For
19   example, job creation, retraining for new jobs, local production of livelihood necessities, social
20   provisioning, and other positive steps toward climate mitigation and adaptation are all associated with
21   more equitable and resilient societies (Okvat and Zautra 2011; Bentley 2014; Klinsky et al. 2016; Roy
22   et al. 2018a). At all scales of governance, the popularity and sustainability of climate policies requires
23   attention to the fairness of their health and economic implications for all, and participatory engagement
24   across social groups – a responsible development framing (Cazorla and Toman 2001; Dulal et al. 2009;
25   Chuku 2010; Shonkoff et al. 2011; Navroz 2019; Hofstad and Vedeld 2020; Muttitt and Kartha 2020;
26   Waller et al. 2020; Roy and Schaffartzik 2020; Temper et al. 2020). Far from being secondary or even
27   a distraction from climate mitigation priorities, an equity focus is intertwined with mitigation goals
28   (Klinsky et al. 2016). Demand-side climate mitigation options have pervasive ancillary, equity-
29   enhancing benefits, e.g. for health, local livelihoods, and community forest resources (Figure 5.6)
30   (Chhatre and Agrawal 2009; Garg 2011; Shaw et al. 2014; Serrao-Neumann et al. 2015; Klausbruckner
31   et al. 2016; Salas and Jha 2019). Limiting climate change risks is fundamental to collective well-being
32   (Max-Neef et al. 1989; Yamin et al. 2005; Nelson et al. 2013; Pecl et al. 2017; Tschakert et al. 2017;
33   Gough 2015, 2017). Section 5.6 discusses well-designed climate policies more fully, with examples.
34   Rapid changes in social norms which are underway and which underlie socially-acceptable climate
35   policy initiatives are discussed in section 5.4.
36
37   The distinction between necessities and luxuries helps to frame a growing stream of social sciences
38   literature with climate policy relevance (Arrow et al. 2004; Ramakrishnan and Creutzig 2021). Given
39   growing public support worldwide for strong sustainability, sufficiency, and sustainable consumption,
40   changing demand patterns and reduced demand are accompanying environmental and social benefits
41   (Jackson 2008; Fedrigo et al. 2010; Schroeder 2013; Figge et al. 2014; Spangenberg and Germany 2016;
42   Spengler 2016; Mont et al. 2020; Burke 2020). Beyond a threshold, increased material consumption is
43   not closely correlated with improvements in human progress (Kahneman and Deaton 2010; Vita et al.
44   2019b, 2020; Frank 1999; Steinberger and Roberts 2010; Oishi et al. 2018; Xie et al. 2018; Wang et al.
45   2019; Roy et al. 2012). Policies focusing on the “super-rich,” also called the “polluter elite,” are gaining
46   attention for moral or norms-based as well as emissions-control reasons (Kenner 2019; Pascale et al.
47   2020; Stratford 2020; Otto et al. 2019) (see Section 5.2.2.3). Conspicuous consumption by the wealthy
48   is the cause of a large proportion of emissions in all countries, related to expenditures on such things as
49   air travel, tourism, large private vehicles and large homes (Brand and Boardman 2008; Brand and



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-29                                 Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

1   Preston 2010; Gore 2015; Sahakian 2018; Osuoka and Haruna 2019; Lynch et al. 2019; Roy and Pal
2   2009; Hubacek et al. 2017; Jorgenson et al. 2017; Gössling 2019; Kenner 2019; Roy et al. 2012).
3   Since no country now meets its citizens’ basic needs at a level of resource use that is globally
4   sustainable, while high levels of life satisfaction for those just escaping extreme poverty require even
5   more resources, the need for transformative shifts in governance and policies is large (O’Neill et al.
6   2018; Vogel et al. 2021).




    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-30                                Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

1




2                  Figure 5.6 Two-way link between demand-side climate mitigation strategies and multiple dimensions of human well-being and SDGs.
3         All demand-side mitigation strategies improve well-being in sum, though not necessarily in each individual dimension. Incumbent business (in contrast to
4                                                           overall economic performance) may be challenged.
5                                                                       Source: Creutzig et al. 2021b



    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                5-31                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   Inequitable societies use energy and resources less efficiently. Higher income inequality is
 2   associated with higher carbon emissions, at least in developed countries (Grunewald et al. 2011; Golley
 3   and Meng 2012; Chancel et al. 2015; Grunewald et al. 2017; Jorgenson et al. 2017; Sager 2017; Klasen
 4   2018; Liu et al. 2019); reducing inequality in high-income countries helps to reduce emissions (Klasen
 5   2018). There is high agreement in the literature that alienation or distrust weakens collective governance
 6   and fragments political approaches towards climate action (Smit and Pilifosova 2001; Adger et al. 2003;
 7   Hammar and Jagers 2007; Van Vossole 2012; Bulkeley and Newell 2015; Smith and Howe 2015; ISSC
 8   et al. 2016; Smith and Mayer 2018; Fairbrother et al. 2019; Kulin and Johansson Sevä 2019; Liao et al.
 9   2019; Alvaredo et al. 2018; Hayward and Roy 2019).
10
11   Populism and politics of fear are less prevalent under conditions of more income equality (Chevigny
12   2003; Bryson and Rauwolf 2016; O’Connor 2017; Fraune and Knodt 2018; Myrick and Evans Comfort
13   2019). Ideology and other social factors also play a role in populist climate scepticism, but many of
14   these also relate to resentment of elites and desire for engagement (Swyngedouw 2011; Lockwood
15   2018; Huber et al. 2020). “Climate populism” movements are driven by an impetus for justice (Beeson
16   2019; Hilson 2019). When people feel powerless and/or that climate change is too big a problem to
17   solve because others are not acting, they may take less action themselves (Williams and Jaftha 2020).
18   However, systems for benefit-sharing can build trust and address large-scale “commons dilemmas”, in
19   the context of strong civil society (Barnett 2003; Mearns and Norton 2009; Inderberg et al. 2015;
20   Sovacool et al. 2015; Hunsberger et al. 2017; Soliev and Theesfeld 2020). Leadership is also important
21   in fostering environmentally-responsible group behaviours (Liu and Hao 2020).
22   In some less-developed countries, higher income inequality may in fact be associated with lower per
23   capita emissions, but this is because people who are excluded by poverty from access to fossil fuels
24   must rely on biomass (Klasen 2018). Such energy poverty – the fact that millions of people do not have
25   access to energy sources to help meet human needs – implies the opposite of development (Guruswamy
26   2010, 2020). In developing countries, livelihood improvements do not necessarily cause increases in
27   emissions (Peters et al. 2012; Reusser et al. 2013; Creutzig et al. 2015a; Chhatre and Agrawal 2009;
28   Baltruszewicz et al. 2021) and poverty alleviation causes negligible emissions (Chakravarty et al. 2009).
29   Greater equity is an important step towards sustainable service provisioning (Godfray et al. 2018;
30   Dorling 2019; Timko 2019).
31
32   As discussed in Section 5.6, policies to assist the low-carbon energy transition can be designed to
33   include additional benefits for income equality, besides contributing to greater energy access for the
34   poor (Burke and Stephens 2017; Frank 2017; Healy and Barry 2017; Sen 2017; Chapman et al. 2018;
35   La Viña et al. 2018; Chapman and Fraser 2019; Piggot et al. 2019; Sunderland et al. 2020). Global and
36   intergenerational climate inequities impact people’s well-being, which affects their consumption
37   patterns and political actions (Gori-Maia 2013; Clayton et al. 2015; Pizzigati 2018; Albrecht et al. 2007;
38   Fritze et al. 2008) (see Box 5.4).
39
40   Consumption reductions, both voluntary and policy-induced, can have positive and double-
41   dividend effects on efficiency as well as reductions in energy and materials use (Mulder et al.
42   2006; Harriss and Shui 2010; Grinde et al. 2018; Spangenberg and Lorek 2019; Figge et al. 2014;
43   Vita et al. 2020). Less waste, better emissions control and more effective carbon policies lead to better
44   governance and stronger democracies. Systems-dynamics models linking strong emissions-reducing
45   policies and strong social equity policies show that a low-carbon transition in conjunction with social
46   sustainability is possible, even without economic growth (Kallis et al. 2012; Jackson and Victor 2016;
47   Stuart et al. 2017; S. D’alessandro et al. 2019; Huang et al. 2019; Victor 2019; Chapman and Fraser
48   2019; Gabriel and Bond 2019). Such degrowth pathways may be crucial in combining technical
49   feasibility of mitigation with social development goals (Hickel et al. 2021; Keyßer and Lenzen 2021).



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-32                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   Multi-level or polycentric governance can enhance well-being and improve climate governance and
 2   social resilience, due to varying adaptive, flexible policy interventions at different times and scales
 3   (Kern and Bulkeley 2009; Lidskog and Elander 2009; Amundsen et al. 2010; Keskitalo 2010; Lee and
 4   Koski 2015; Jokinen et al. 2016; Lepeley 2017; Marquardt 2017; Di Gregorio et al. 2019). Institutional
 5   transformation may also result from socio-ecological stresses that accompany climate change, leading
 6   to more effective governance structures (David Tàbara et al. 2018; Patterson and Huitema 2019; Barnes
 7   et al. 2020). An appropriate, context-specific mix of options facilitated by policies can deliver both
 8   higher well-being and reduced disparity in access to basic needs for services concurrently with climate
 9   mitigation (Thomas and Twyman 2005; Klinsky and Winkler 2014; Lamb et al. 2014; Mearns and
10   Norton 2009; Lamb and Steinberger 2017). Hence, nurturing equitable human well-being through
11   provision of decent living standards for all goes hand in hand with climate change mitigation (ISSC et
12   al. 2016; OECD 2019a). There is high confidence in the literature that addressing inequities in income,
13   wealth, and DLS not only raises overall well-being and furthers the SDGs but also improves the
14   effectiveness of climate change mitigation policies.
15
16   Participatory governance involves understanding and engagement with policies, including
17   climate policies. Greater public participation in climate policy processes and governance, by increasing
18   the diversity of ideas and stakeholders, builds resilience and allows broader societal transformation
19   towards systemic change even in complex, dynamic and contested contexts (Dombrowski 2010; Wise
20   et al. 2014; Haque et al. 2015; Jodoin et al. 2015; Mitchell 2015; Kaiser 2020; Alegria 2021). This
21   sometimes involves complex policy discussions that can lead to governance innovations, also
22   influencing social norms (Martinez 2020). A specific example are citizen assemblies, deliberating
23   public policy challenges, such as climate change (Devaney et al. 2020). Activist climate movements are
24   changing policies as well as normative values (see Section 5.4 and the Social Science Primer).
25   Environmental justice and climate justice activists worldwide have called attention to the links between
26   economic and environmental inequities, collected and publicised data about them, and demanded
27   stronger mitigation (Goodman 2009; Schlosberg and Collins 2014; Jafry et al. 2019; Cheon
28   2020). Youth climate activists, and Indigenous leaders, are also exerting growing political influence
29   towards mitigation (Helferty and Clarke 2009; White 2011; Powless 2012; Petheram et al. 2015;
30   Curnow and Gross 2016; Grady-Benson and Sarathy 2016; Claeys and Delgado Pugley 2017; UN 2015;
31   O’Brien et al. 2018; Rowlands and Gomez Peña 2019; Bergmann and Ossewaarde 2020; Han and Ahn
32   2020; Nkrumah 2021). Indigenous resurgence (activism fuelled by ongoing colonial social /
33   environmental injustices, land claims, and deep spiritual/cultural commitment to environmental
34   protection) not only strengthens climate leadership in many countries, but also changes broad social
35   norms by raising knowledge of Indigenous governance systems which supported sustainable lifeways
36   over thousands of years (Wildcat 2014; Chanza and De Wit 2016; Whyte 2018, 2017; Temper et al.
37   2020). Related trends include recognition of the value of traditional ecological knowledge, Indigenous
38   governance principles, decentralisation, and appropriate technologies (Lange et al. 2007; Goldthau
39   2014; Whyte 2017).
40
41   Social trust aids policy implementation. More equal societies display higher trust, which is a key
42   requirement for successful implementation of climate policies (Rothstein and Teorell 2008; Carattini et
43   al. 2015; Klenert et al. 2018; Patterson et al. 2018). Inter-personal trust among citizens often promotes
44   pro-environment behaviour by influencing perceptions (Harring and Jagers 2013), enhancing
45   cooperation, and reducing free-riding and opportunistic behaviour (Gür 2020). Individual support for
46   carbon taxes and energy innovations falls when collective community support is lacking (Bolsen et al.
47   2014; Simon 2020; Smith and Mayer 2018). Social trust has a positive influence on civic engagement
48   among local communities, NGOs, and self-help groups for local clean cooking fuel installation (Nayak
49   et al. 2015).
50


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-33                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   Section 5.6 includes examples of climate mitigation policies and policy packages which address the
 2   interrelationships shown in Figure 5.5. Improving well-being for all through climate mitigation includes
 3   emissions-reduction goals in policy packages that ensure equitable outcomes, prioritize social trust-
 4   building, support wide public participation in climate action including within the informal sector, and
 5   facilitate institutional change for effective multi-level governance, as integral components of climate
 6   strategies. This strategic approach, and its feasibility of success, rely on complex contextual factors
 7   that may differ widely, especially between Global North and Global South (Atteridge et al. 2012;
 8   Patterson et al. 2018; Jewell and Cherp 2020; Singh et al. 2020, 2021).
 9
10   START BOX 5.4 HERE
11
12                     Box 5.4 Gender, race, intersectionality and climate mitigation

13   There is high evidence and high agreement that empowering women benefits both mitigation and
14   adaptation, because women prioritise climate change in their voting, purchasing, community leadership,
15   and work both professionally and at home (high evidence, high agreement). Increasing voice and agency
16   for those marginalised in intersectional ways by Indigeneity, race, ethnicity, dis/ability, and other
17   factors has positive effects for climate policy (high evidence, high agreement).
18
19   Climate change affects people differently along all measures of difference and identity, which have
20   intersectional impacts linked to economic vulnerability and marginalisation (Morello Frosch et al. 2009;
21   Dankelman 2010; Habtezion 2013; Godfrey and Torres 2016; Walsh 2016; Flatø et al. 2017; Goodrich
22   et al. 2019; Perkins 2019; Gür 2020). Worldwide, racialized and Indigenous people bear the brunt of
23   environmental and climate injustices through geographic location in extraction and energy “sacrifice
24   zones”, areas most impacted by extreme weather events, and/or through inequitable energy access
25   (Aubrey 2019; Gonzalez 2020; Lacey-Barnacle et al. 2020; Porter et al. 2020; Temper et al. 2020; Jafry
26   et al. 2019) Disparities in climate change vulnerability not only reflect pre-existing inequalities, they
27   also reinforce them. For example, inequities in income and in the ownership and control of household
28   assets, familial responsibilities due to male out-migration, declining food and water access, and
29   increased disaster exposure can undermine women's ability to achieve economic independence, enhance
30   human capital, and maintain physical and mental health and well-being (Chandra et al. 2017; Eastin
31   2018; Das et al. 2019). Studies during the COVID crisis have found that, in general, women’s economic
32   and productive lives have been affected disproportionately to men’s (Alon et al. 2020; ILO 2020).
33   Women have less access to social protections and their capacity to absorb economic shocks is very low,
34   so they face a “triple burden” during crises -- including those resulting from climate change -- and this
35   is heightened for women in the less-developed countries and for those who are intersectionally
36   vulnerable (Coates et al. 2020; McLaren et al. 2020; Wenham et al. 2020; Azong and Kelso 2021; Erwin
37   et al. 2021; Maobe and Atela 2021; Nicoson 2021; Sultana 2021; Versey 2021). Because men currently
38   hold the majority of energy-sector jobs, energy transition will impact them economically and
39   psychologically; benefits, burdens and opportunities on both the demand and supply sides of the
40   mitigation transition have a range of equity implications (Pearl-Martinez and Stephens 2017; Standal et
41   al. 2020; Mang-Benza 2021). Mitigating gendered climate impacts requires addressing inequitable
42   power relations throughout society(Wester and Lama 2019).
43
44   Women’s well-being and gender-responsive climate policy have been emphasized in international
45   agreements including the Paris accord (UNFCCC 2015), CEDAW General Recommendation 37
46   (Vijeyarasa 2021), and the 2016 Decision 21/CP.22 on Gender and Climate Change (UNFCCC 2016;
47   Larson et al. 2018). Increasing the participation of women and marginalised social groups, and
48   addressing their special needs, helps to meet a range of SDGs, improve disaster and crisis response,
49   increase social trust, and improve climate mitigation policy development and implementation (Alber



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-34                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   2009; Whyte 2014; Elnakat and Gomez 2015; Salehi et al. 2015; Buckingham and Kulcur 2017; Cohen
 2   2017; Kronsell 2017; Lee and Zusman 2019).
 3
 4   Women have a key role in the changing energy economy due to their demand and end use of energy
 5   resources in socially-gendered productive roles in food production and processing, health, care,
 6   education, clothing purchases and maintenance, commerce, and other work both within and beyond the
 7   home (Räty and Carlsson-Kanyama 2009; Oparaocha and Dutta 2011; Bob and Babugura 2014;
 8   Macgregor 2014; Perez et al. 2015; Bradshaw 2018; Clancy and Feenstra 2019; Clancy et al. 2019;
 9   Fortnam et al. 2019; Rao et al. 2019a; Quandt 2019; Horen Greenford et al. 2020; Johnson 2020).
10   Women’s work and decision-making are central in the food chain and agricultural output in most
11   developing countries, and in household management everywhere. Emissions from cooking fuels can
12   cause serious health damages, and unsustainable extraction of biofuels can also hurt mitigation (Bailis
13   et al. 2015), so considering health, biodiversity and climate tr adeoffs and co-benefits is important
14   (Rosenthal et al. 2018; Aberilla et al. 2020; Mazorra et al. 2020) . Policies on energy use and
15   consumption are often focused on technical issues related to energy supply, thereby overlooking
16   ‘demand-side’ factors such as household decision-making, unpaid work, livelihoods and care
17   (Himmelweit 2002; Perch 2011; Fumo 2014; Hans et al. 2019; Huyer and Partey 2020). Such gender-
18   blindness represents the manifestation of wider issues related to political ideology, culture and tradition
19   (Carr and Thompson 2014; Thoyre 2020; Perez et al. 2015; Fortnam et al. 2019).
20
21   Women, and all those who are economically and/or politically marginalised, often have less access to
22   energy and use less, not just because they may be poorer but case studies show because their
23   consumption choices are more ecologically-inclined and their energy use is more efficient (Lee et al.
24   2013; Permana et al. 2015; Li et al. 2019). Women’s carbon footprints are about 6-28% lower than
25   men’s (with high variation across countries), mostly based on their lower meat consumption and lower
26   vehicle use (Isenhour and Ardenfors 2009; Räty and Carlsson-Kanyama 2010; Barnett et al. 2012;
27   Medina and Toledo-Bruno 2016; Ahmad et al. 2017; Fernström Nåtby and Rönnerfalk 2018; Räty and
28   Carlsson-Kanyama 2009; Li et al. 2019). Gender-based income redistribution in the form of pay equity
29   for women could reduce emissions if the redistribution is revenue-neutral (Terry 2009; Dengler and
30   Strunk 2018). Also, advances in female education and reproductive health, especially voluntary family
31   planning, can contribute greatly to reducing world population growth (Abel et al. 2016; Dodson et al.
32   2020).
33
34   Carbon emissions are lower per capita in countries where women have more political ‘voice’,
35   controlling for GDP per capita and a range of other factors (Ergas and York 2012). While most people
36   recognize that climate change is happening (Lewis et al. 2018; Ballew et al. 2019), climate denialism
37   is more prevalent among men (McCright and Dunlap 2011; Anshelm and Hultman 2014; Jylhä et al.
38   2016; Nagel 2015), while women are more likely to be environmental activists, and to support stronger
39   environmental and climate policies (Stein 2004; McCright and Xiao 2014, Whyte 2014). Racialised
40   groups are more likely to be concerned about climate change and to take political action to support
41   climate mitigation policies (Leiserowitz and Akerlof 2010; Schuldt and Pearson 2016; Pearson et al.
42   2017; Ballew et al. 2020; Godfrey and Torres 2016; Johnson 2020). This underscores the important
43   synergies between equity and mitigation. The contributions of women, racialised people, and
44   Indigenous people who are socially positioned as those first and most affected by climate change – and
45   therefore experts on appropriate climate responses – are substantial (Dankelman and Jansen 2010;
46   Wickramasinghe 2015; Black 2016; Vinyeta et al. 2016; Pearse 2017). Equitable power, participation,
47   and agency in climate policy-making is hence an effective contribution for improving governance and
48   decision making on climate change mitigation (Reckien et al. 2017; Collins 2019). Indigenous
49   knowledge is an important source of guidance for biodiversity conservation, impact assessment,
50   governance, disaster preparedness and resilience (Salick and Ross 2009; Green and Raygorodetsky


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-35                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   2010; Speranza et al. 2010; Mekuriaw Bizuneh 2013; Mekuriaw 2017), and women are often the local
 2   educators, passing on and utilising traditional and Indigenous knowledge (Ketlhoilwe 2013; Onyige
 3   2017; Azong et al. 2018).
 4
 5   Higher female political participation, controlled for other factors, leads to higher stringency in climate
 6   policies, and results in lower GHG emissions (Cook et al. 2019). Gender equity also is correlated with
 7   lower per capita CO2-eq emissions (Ergas and York 2012). In societies where women have more
 8   economic equity, their votes push political decision-making in the direction of
 9   environmental/sustainable development policies, less high-emission militarisation, and more emphasis
10   on equity and social policies e.g. via wealth and capital gains taxes (Resurrección 2013; UNEP 2013;
11   Glemarec et al. 2016; Bryan et al. 2018; Crawford 2019; Ergas and York 2012). Changing social norms
12   on race and climate are linked and policy-relevant (Benegal 2018; Elias et al. 2018; Slocum 2018; Gach
13   2019; Wallace-Wells 2019; Temple 2020; Drolet 2021). For all these reasons, climate policies are
14   strengthened by including more differently-situated knowledge and diverse perspectives, such as
15   feminist expertise in the study of power (Bell et al. 2020a; Lieu et al. 2020); clarifying equity goals (e.g.
16   distinguishing among ‘reach, ‘benefit’, and ‘empowerment’; obtaining disaggregated data and using
17   clear empirical equity measures; and confronting deeply-engrained inequities in society (Lau et al.
18   2021). Inclusivity in climate governance spans mitigation-adaptation, supply-demand and formal-
19   informal sector boundaries in its positive effects (Morello Frosch et al. 2009; Dankelman 2010; Bryan
20   and Behrman 2013; Habtezion 2013; Godfrey and Torres 2016; Walsh 2016; Flatø et al. 2017; Wilson
21   et al. 2018; Goodrich et al. 2019; Perkins 2019; Bell et al. 2020b; Gür 2020).
22
23   END BOX 5.4 HERE
24
25   5.3 Mapping the opportunity space
26   Reducing global energy demand and resource inputs while improving well-being for all requires an
27   identification of options, services and pathways that do not compromise essentials of a decent living.
28   To identify such a solution space, this section summarises socio-cultural, technological and
29   infrastructural interventions through the avoid/shift/improve (ASI) concept. ASI (see Section 5.1)
30   provides a categorisation of options aimed at continuously eliminating wastes in the current systems of
31   service provision (see Section 5.3.1.1). It also concisely presents demand side options to reduce GHG
32   emissions by individual choices which can be leveraged by supporting policies, technologies and
33   infrastructure. Two key concepts for evaluating the efficiency of service provision systems are: resource
34   cascades and exergy. These concepts provide powerful analytical lenses through which to identify and
35   substantially reduce energy and resource waste in service provision systems both for decent living
36   standards (see Section 5.3.2) and higher well-being levels. They typically focus on end-use conversion
37   and service delivery improvements as the most influential opportunities for system-wide waste
38   reductions. Review of the state of modelling low energy and resource demand pathways in long-term
39   climate mitigation scenarios (recognising the importance of such scenarios for illuminating technology
40   and policy pathways for more efficient service provision) and summary of the mitigation potentials
41   estimated from relevant scenarios to date are in Section 5.3.3. Finally, it reviews the role of three
42   megatrends that are transforming delivery of the services in innovative ways – digitalisation, the sharing
43   economy, and the circular economy (see Section 5.3.4). The review of megatrends makes an assessment
44   highlighting the potential risks of rebound effects, and even accelerated consumption; it also scopes for
45   proactive and vigilant policies to harness their potential for future energy and resource demand
46   reductions, and, conversely, avoiding undesirable outcomes.
47



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-36                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   5.3.1 Efficient service provision
 2   This section organises demand reductions under the ASI framework. It presents service-oriented
 3   demand-side solutions consistent with decent living standards (Table 5.1) (Creutzig et al. 2018). The
 4   sharing economy, digitalisation, and the circular economy all can contribute to ASI strategies, with the
 5   circular economy tentatively more on the supply side, and the sharing economy and digitalisation
 6   tentatively more on the demand side (see Section 5.3.4). These new service delivery models go beyond
 7   sectoral boundaries (IPCC sector chapter boundaries explained in Chapter 12) and take advantage of
 8   technological innovations, design concepts, and innovative forms of cooperation cutting across sectors
 9   to contribute to systemic changes worldwide. Some of these changes can be realised in the short term,
10   such as energy access, while others may take a longer period, such as radical and systemic eco-
11   innovations like shared electric autonomous vehicles. It is important to understand benefits and
12   distributional impacts of these systemic changes.
13
14   5.3.1.1    Integration of service provision solutions with A-S-I framework
15   Assessment of service-related mitigation options within the ASI framework is aided by decomposition
16   of emissions intensities into explanatory contributing factors, which depend on the type of service
17   delivered. Table 5.1 shows ASI options in selected sectors and services. It summarises resource, energy,
18   and emissions intensities commonly used by type of service (Cuenot et al. 2010; Lucon et al. 2014;
19   Fischedick et al. 2014). Also relevant: the concepts of service provision adequacy (Arrow et al. 2004;
20   Samadi et al. 2017), establishing the extents to which consumption levels exceed (e.g., high-calorie
21   diets contributing to health issues (Roy et al. 2012); excessive food waste) or fall short of (e.g.,
22   malnourishment) service level sufficiency (e.g., recommended calories) (Millward-Hopkins et al.
23   2020); and service level efficiency (e.g., effect of occupancy on the energy intensity of public transit
24   passenger-km travelled (Schäfer and Yeh 2020). Service-oriented solutions in this chapter are discussed
25   in the context of Table 5.1. Implementation of these solutions requires combinations of institutional,
26   infrastructural, behavioural, socio-cultural, and business changes that are mentioned in Section 5.2 and
27   discussed in Section 5.4.

28   Table 5.1 Avoid-Shift-Improve options in selected sectors and services. Many options, such as urban form
29     and infrastructures are systemic, and influence several sectors simultaneously. Linkages to concepts
30                presented in sectoral chapters are indicated in parentheses in the first column.
31                                   Source: adapted from Creutzig at al. 2018

      Service        Emission              Avoid                   Shift                  Improve
                     decomposition
                     factors
      Mobility       kg CO2 = (passenger   Innovative mobility     Increased options      Innovation in
      [passenger-    km)*(MJ pkm-          to reduce               for mobility MJ        equipment design
                     1
      km]              )*(kg CO2 MJ-1)     passenger-km:           pkm-1:                 MJ pkm-1 and CO2-
      (Ch 8,10,                            Integrate transport &   Modal shifts,          eq MJ-1:
      11,16)                               land use planning       from car to cycling,   Lightweight vehicles
                                           Smart logistics         walking, or public     Hydrogen vehicles
                                           Tele-working            transit                Electric vehicles
                                           Compact cities          from air travel to     Eco-driving
                                           Fewer long-haul         high speed rail
                                           flights
                                           Local holidays
      Shelter        kg CO2 = (square      Innovative              Material efficient     Low emission
      [Square        meters)*(tons         dwellings to reduce     housing tons           dwelling design
      meters]        material m-2)*(kg     square meters:          material m-2:          kgCO2 ton-1
      (Ch 8,9, 11)   CO2 ton material-1)   Smaller decent          Less material-         material:
                                           dwellings               intensive dwelling     Use wood as
                                                                   designs                material



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-37                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                    Chapter 5                                IPCC AR6 WGIII

                                            Shared common           Shift from single-       Use low-carbon
                                            spaces                  family to multi-         production processes
                                            Multigenerational       family dwellings         for building
                                            housing                                          materials (e.g.,
                                                                                             cement and steel)
      Thermal        kg CO2 = (Δ°C m3       Choice of healthy       Design options to        New technologies to
      comfort        to warm or cool)       indoor temperature      reduce MJ Δ°C-1 m-       reduce MJ Δ°C-1 m-
      [indoor        (MJ m-3)*(kg CO2       Δ°C m3:                 3
                                                                      :                      3
                                                                                               and kgCO2/MJ:
      temperature]   MJ-1)                  Reduce m2 as above      Architectural design     Solar thermal
      (Ch 9,16)                             Change temperature      (shading, natural        devices
                                            set-points              ventilation, etc.)       Improved insulation
                                            Change dressing                                  Heat pumps
                                            code                                             District heating
                                            Change working
                                            times

      Goods          kg CO2 = product       More service per        Innovative product       Choice of new
      [units]        units * (kg material   product:                design kg material       materials kg CO2
      (Ch 11,12)     product-1)*(kg CO2     Reduce consumption      product -1:              kg material-1:
                     kg material-1)         quantities              Materials efficient      Use of low carbon
                                            Long lasting fabric,    product designs          materials
                                            appliances                                       New manufacturing
                                            Sharing economy                                  processes and
                                                                                             equipment use
      Nutrition      kg CO2-eq =            Reduce calories         Add more variety         Reduce kg CO2-eq
      [Calories      (calories              produced/calories       in food plate to         cal-1 produced:
      consumed]      consumed)*(calories    consumed and            reduce kg CO2-eq         Improved
      (Ch 6,12)      produced calories      optimize calories       cal-1 produced           agricultural practices
                     consumed-1)*(kg        consumed:               Dietary shifts from      Energy efficient food
                     CO2-eq calorie         Keep calories in line   ruminant meat and        processing
                     produced-1)            with daily needs and    dairy to other protein
                                            health guidelines       sources while
                                            Reduce waste in         maintaining
                                            supply chain and        nutritional quality
                                            after purchase
      Lighting       kg CO2 =               Minimize artificial     Design options to        Demand innovation
      [lumens]       lumens*(kWh            lumen demand:           increase natural         lighting
      (Ch 9, 16)     lumen-1)*(kg CO2       Occupancy sensors       lumen supply:            technologies kWh
                     kWh-1)                 Lighting controls       Architectural designs    lumens-1 and power
                                                                    with maximal             supply kg CO2
                                                                    daylighting              kWh-1:
                                                                                             LED lamps

 1
 2   Opportunities for avoiding waste associated with the provision of services, or avoiding overprovision
 3   of or excess demand for services themselves, exist across multiple service categories. Avoid options
 4   are relevant in all end-use sectors, namely, teleworking and avoiding long-haul flights, adjusting
 5   dwelling size to household size, avoiding short life span product, and food waste. Cities and built
 6   environments can play an additional role. For example, more compact designs and higher accessibility
 7   reduce travel demand and translate into lower average floor space and corresponding heating/cooling
 8   and lighting demand, and thus between 5% to 20% of GHG emissions of end-use sectors (Creutzig et
 9   al. 2021b). Avoidance of food loss and wastage – which equalled 8–10% of total anthropogenic GHG
10   emissions from 2010-2016 (Mbow et al. 2019), while millions suffer from hunger and malnutrition – is
11   a prime example (see Chapter 12). A key challenge in meeting global nutrition services is therefore to
12   avoid food loss and waste while simultaneously raising nutrition levels to equitable standards globally.
13   Literature results indicate that in developed economies consumers are the largest source of food waste,



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-38                                    Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   and that behavioural changes such as meal planning, use of leftovers, and avoidance of over-preparation
 2   can be important service-oriented solutions (Gunders et al. 2017; Schanes et al. 2018), while
 3   improvements to expiration labels by regulators would reduce unnecessary disposal of unexpired items
 4   (Wilson et al. 2017) and improved preservation in supply chains would reduce spoilage (Duncan and
 5   Gulbahar 2019). ~931 million tons of food waste was generated in 2019 globally, 61% of which came
 6   from households, 26% from food service and 13% from retail.
 7
 8   Demand side mitigations are achieved through changing Socio-cultural factors, Infrastructure use and
 9   Technology adoption by various social actors in urban and other settlements, food choice and waste
10   management (high confidence) (Figure 5.7). In all sectors, end-use strategies can help reduce the
11   majority of emissions, ranging from 28.7% (4.13 GtCO2-eq) emission reductions in the industry sector,
12   to 44.2% (7.96 GtCO2-eq) in the food sectors, to 66.75% (4.671 GtCO2-eq) emission reductions in the
13   land transport sector, and 66% (5.763 GtCO2-eq) in the buildings sector. These numbers are median
14   estimates and represent benchmark accounting. Estimates are approximations, as they are simple
15   products of individual assessments for each of the three SIT options. If interactions were taken into
16   account, the full mitigation potentials may be higher or lower, independent of relevant barriers to
17   realizing the median potential estimates. See more in Supplementary Material II Chapter 5, Table SM2.
18
19   The technical mitigation potential of food loss and waste reductions globally has been estimated at 0.1-
20   5.8 GtCO2-eq (high confidence) (Poore and Nemecek 2018; Smith, et al. 2019) (Figure 5.7, 7.4.5, Table
21   12.3). Coupling food waste reductions with dietary shifts can further reduce energy, land, and resource
22   demand in upstream food provision systems, leading to substantial GHG emissions benefits. The
23   estimated technical potential for GHG emissions reductions associated with shifts to sustainable healthy
24   diets is 0.5-8 GtCO2-eq (Smith et al. 2013; Jarmul et al. 2020; Creutzig et al. 2021b) (Figure 5.7, Table
25   12.2) (high confidence). Current literature on health, diets, and emissions indicates that sustainable food
26   systems providing healthy diets for all are within reach but require significant cross-sectoral action,
27   including improved agricultural practices, dietary shifts among consumers, and food waste reductions
28   in production, distribution, retail, and consumption (Table 12.9) (Erb et al. 2016; Muller et al. 2017;
29   Willett and al. 2018; Graça et al. 2019).
30
31   Reduced food waste and dietary shifts have highly relevant repercussions in the land use sector that
32   underpin the high GHG emission reduction potential. Demand side measure lead to changes in
33   consumption of land-based resources and can save GHG emissions by reducing or improving
34   management of residues or making land areas available for other uses such as afforestation or bioenergy
35   production (Smith et al. 2013; Hoegh-Guldberg et al. 2019). Deforestation is the second largest source
36   of anthropogenic greenhouse gas emissions, caused mainly by expanding forestry and agriculture and
37   in many cases this agricultural expansion is driven by trade demand for food e. g. across the tropics,
38   cattle and oilseed products accounts for half of the resulted deforestation carbon-emissions, embodied
39   in international trade to China and Europe (Creutzig et al. 2019a; Pendrill et al. 2019). Benefits from
40   shifts in diets and resulting lowered land pressure are also reflected in reductions of land degradation
41   and improved.
42
43   Increased demand for biomass can increase the pressure on forest and conservation areas (Cowie et al.
44   2013) and poses an heightened risk for biodiversity, livelihoods, and intertemporal carbon balances
45   (Creutzig et al. 2021c; Lamb et al. 2016) requiring policy and regulations to ensure sustainable forest
46   management which depends on forest type, region, management, climate, and ownership. This suggests
47   that demand-side actions hold sustainability advantages over the intensive use of bioenergy and
48   BECCS, but also enable land use for bioenergy by saving agricultural land for food.
49



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-39                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   In the transport sector, ASI opportunities exist at multiple levels, comprehensively summarised in
 2   Bongardt et al (2013), Roy et al (2021) and Sims et al (2014) (Chapter 10). Modelling based on a
 3   plethora of bottom-up insights and options reveals that a balanced portfolio of ASI policies brings the
 4   global transport sector emissions in line with global warming of not more than 1.5°C (Gota et al. 2019).
 5   For example, telework may be a significant lever for avoiding road transport associated with daily
 6   commutes, achievable through digitalisation, but its savings depend heavily on the modes, distances,
 7   and types of office use avoided (Hook et al. 2020) and whether additional travel is induced due to greater
 8   available time (Mokhtarian 2002) or vehicle use by other household members (Kim et al. 2015; de
 9   Abreu e Silva and Melo 2018). More robustly, avoiding kilometres travelled through improved urban
10   planning and smart logistical systems can lead to fuel, and, hence, emissions savings (IEA 2016, 2017a;
11   Creutzig et al. 2015a; Wiedenhofer et al. 2018), or through avoiding long-haul flights (IEA 2021). For
12   example, reallocating road and parking space to exclusive public transit lanes, protected bike lanes and
13   pedestrian priority streets can reduce vehicle kilometres travelled in urban areas (ITF 2021). At the
14   vehicle level, light weighting strategies (Fischedick et al. 2014) and avoiding inputs of carbon-intensive
15   materials into vehicle manufacturing can also lead to significant emissions savings through improved
16   fuel economy (Das et al. 2016; Hertwich et al. 2019; IEA 2019b).
17
18   Figure 5.7 shows Socio-cultural factors can contribute up to 15% to land transport GHG emissions
19   reduction by 2050, with 5% as our central estimate. Active mobility, such as walking and cycling, has
20   2%-10% potential in GHG emissions reduction. Well-design teleworking and telecommuting policies
21   can at least reduce transport related GHG emissions by 1%. A systematic review demonstrates that 26
22   of 39 studies identified suggest that teleworking reduces energy use, induced mainly by distance
23   traveled, and only eight studies suggest that teleworking increases or has a neutral impact on energy use
24   (Hook et al. 2020). Infrastructure use (specifically urban planning and shared pooled mobility) has about
25   20-50% (on average) potential in the land transport GHG emissions reduction, especially via redirecting
26   the ongoing design of existing infrastructures in developing countries, and with 30% as our central
27   estimate (see also 5.3.4.2). Technology adoption, particularly banning ICEs and 100% EV targets and
28   efficient lightweight cars, can contribute to between 30 and 70% of GHG emissions reduction in land
29   transport in 2050, with 50% as our central estimate. For details see Supplementary Material II Chapter
30   5, Table SM2 and Chapter 10.
31
32   Socio-cultural factors such avoid long-haul flights and shifting to train wherever possible can contribute
33   between 10% and 40% to aviation GHG emissions reduction by 2050 (Figure 5.7). Maritime transport
34   (shipping) emits around 940 MtCO2 annually and is responsible for about 2.5% of global GHG
35   emissions (IMO 2020). Technology measures and management measures, such as slow steaming,
36   weather routing, contra-rotating propellers, and propulsion efficiency devices can deliver more fuel
37   savings between 1% and 40% than the investment required (Bouman et al. 2017). For details see
38   Supplementary Material II Chapter 5, Table SM2.
39
40   In the buildings sector, avoidance strategies can occur at the end use or individual building operation
41   level. End use technologies/strategies such as the use of daylighting (Bodart and De Herde 2002) and
42   lighting sensors can avoid demand for lumens from artificial light, while passive houses, thermal mass,
43   and smart controllers can avoid demand for space conditioning services. Eliminating standby power
44   losses can avoid energy wasted for no useful service in many appliances/devices, which may reduce
45   household electricity use by up to 10% (Roy et al. 2012). At the building level, smaller dwellings can
46   reduce overall demand for lighting and space conditioning services, while smaller dwellings, shared
47   housing, and building lifespan extension can all reduce the overall demand for carbon-intensive building
48   materials such as concrete and steel (Material Economics 2018; Pauliuk et al. 2021; Hertwich et al.
49   2019; IEA 2019b). Emerging strategies for materials efficiency, such as 3D printing to optimise the



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-40                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   geometries and minimise the materials content of structural elements, may also play a key role if thermal
 2   performance and circularity can be improved (Mahadevan et al. 2020; Adaloudis and Bonnin Roca
 3   2021). Several scenarios estimate an ‘avoid’ potential in the building sector, which includes reducing
 4   waste in superfluous floor space, heating and IT equipment, and energy use, of between 10 and 30%,
 5   in one case even by 50% (Nadel, Steven and Ungar 2019). For details see Chapter 9.
 6   Socio-cultural factors and behavioral and social practices in energy saving like adaptive hearing and
 7   cooling by changing temperature can contribute about 15% to Buildings GHG emissions reduction by
 8   2050 (Figure 5.7). Infrastructure use such as compact city and urban planning interventions, living floor
 9   space rationalization, and access to low carbon architectural design has about 20% potential in the
10   Buildings GHG emissions reduction. Technology adoption, particularly access to energy efficient
11   technologies, and choice for installation of renewable can contribute between 30% and 70% to GHG
12   emissions reeducation in Buildings sector. For details see Supplementary Material II Chapter 5, Table
13   SM2 and Chapter 8 and 9 .
14
15   Service efficiency strategies are emerging to avoid materials demand at the product level, including
16   dematerialisation strategies for various forms of packaging (Worrell and Van Sluisveld 2013) and the
17   concept of “products as services,” in which product systems are designed and maintained for long
18   lifespans to provide a marketable service (Oliva and Kallenberg 2003), thereby reducing the number of
19   products sold and tons of materials needed to provide the same service to consumers, consistent with
20   circular economy and materials efficiency principles (see Chapter 11). Successful examples of this
21   approach have been documented for carpets (Stubbs and Cocklin 2008), copiers (Roy 2000), kitchens
22   (Liedtke et al. 1998), vehicles (Ceschin and Vezzoli 2010; Williams 2006) and more (Roy 2000).
23
24   Shift strategies unique to the service-oriented perspective generally involve meeting service demands
25   at much lower life-cycle energy, emissions, and resource intensities (Roy and Pal 2009), through such
26   strategies as shifting from single-family to multi-family dwellings (reducing the materials intensity per
27   unit floor area (Ochsendorf et al. 2011)), shifting from passenger cars to rail or bus (reducing fuel,
28   vehicle manufacturing, and infrastructure requirements (Chester and Horvath 2009), shifting materials
29   to reduce resource and emissions intensities (e.g., low-carbon concrete blends (Scrivener and Gartner
30   2018)) and shifting from conventional to additive manufacturing processes to reduce materials
31   requirements and improve end-use product performance (Huang et al. 2016, 2017).
32
33   An important consideration in all ASI strategies is the potential for unintended rebound effects (Sorrell
34   et al. 2009; Brockway et al. 2021) as indicated in Figures 5.8, 5.12, and 5.13a, which must be carefully
35   avoided through various regulatory and behavioural measures (Santarius et al. 2016) and in many
36   developing country contexts rebound effects can help in accelerated provision of affordable access to
37   modern energy and a minimum level of per capita energy consumption (Saunders et al. 2021;
38   Chakravarty and Roy 2021). Extending the lifespan of energy inefficient products may lead to net
39   increases in emissions (Gutowski et al. 2011), whereas automated car sharing may reduce the number
40   of cars manufactured at the expense of increased demand for passenger kilometres due to lower travel
41   opportunity cost (Wadud et al. 2016) (see also 5.3.2).
42
43   Avoid short life span products in favour of products with longer lifespan as a socio-cultural factor;
44   infrastructure use such as increasing the re-usability and recyclability of product's components and
45   materials; and adopting the materials-efficient services and CO2-neutral materials have about 29%
46   indicative potential by 2050. For details see Supplementary Material II Chapter 5, Table SM2 and
47   Chapter 11.
48
49   In summary, sector specific demand side mitigation options reflect important role of socio-cultural,
50   technological and infrastructural factors and interdependence among them (Figure 5.7). The assessment


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-41                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                    Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   in Figure 5.7 shows by 2050 high emission reduction potential can be realised with demand side actions
 2   alone which can be complementary to supply side interventions with considerable impact by reducing
 3   need for capacity addition on the electricity supply system. Integrated cross sectoral actions shown
 4   through sector coupling is also important for investment decision making and policy framing going
 5   beyond sector boundaries (high evidence and high agreement).
 6




 7
 8
 9                         Figure 5.7 Demand-side mitigation options and indicative potentials
10      Mitigation response options related to demand for services have been categorised into three domains:
11          ‘socio-cultural factors’, related to social norms, culture, and individual choices and behaviour;
12    ‘infrastructure use’, related to the provision and use of supporting infrastructure that enables individual
13       choices and behaviour; and ‘technology adoption’, which refers to the uptake of technologies by end
14        users. Potentials in 2050 are estimated using the International Energy Agency’s 2020 World Energy
15        Outlook STEPS (Stated Policy Scenarios) as a baseline. This scenario is based on a sector-by-sector
16      assessment of specific policies in place, as well as those that have been announced by countries by mid-
17       2020. This scenario was selected due to the detailed representation of options across sectors and sub-
18       sectors. The heights of the coloured columns represent the potentials on which there is a high level of
19     agreement in the literature, based on a range of case studies. The range shown by the dots connected by
20       dotted lines represents the highest and lowest potentials reported in the literature which have low to
21      medium levels of agreement. The demand side potential of socio-cultural factor in food has two parts.
22       Economic potential of demand reduction through socio-cultural factors alone is 1.9 GtCO2eq without
23         considering LUC by diversion of agricultural land from food production to carbon sequestration
24   purposes. If further changes in choice architectures and LUC due to this change in demand is considered
25   indicative potential becomes 7 GtCO2eq. The electricity panel presents separately the mitigation potential
26          from changes in electricity demand associated with enhanced electrification in end use sectors.
27   Electrification increases electricity demand, while it is avoided though demand-side mitigation strategies.
28      Load management refers to demand side flexibility that can be achieved through incentive design like
29    time of use pricing/monitoring by artificial intelligence, diversification of storage facilities etc. NZE (IEA
30       Net Zero Emissions by 2050 Scenario) is used to compute the impact of end use sector electrification,



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-42                                   Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   while the impact of demand side response options is based on bottom-up assessments. Dark grey columns
 2              show the emissions that cannot be avoided through demand-side mitigation options.

 3        The table indicates which demand-side mitigation options are included. Options are categorised
 4               according to: socio-cultural factors, infrastructure use, and technology adoption.
 5                                        (5.3, Supplementary Material 5.II)

 6
 7
 8   5.3.1.2   Household consumption options to reduce GHG emissions
 9   A systematic review of options to reduce the GHG emissions associated with household consumption
10   activities identified 6990 peer-reviewed journal papers, with 771 options that were aggregated into 61
11   consumption option categories ((Ivanova et al. 2020); Figure 5.8). In consistence with previous research
12   (Herendeen and Tanaka 1976; Pachauri and Spreng 2002; Pachauri 2007; Ivanova et al. 2016), a
13   hierarchical list of mitigation options emerges. Choosing low-carbon options, such as car-free living,
14   plant-based diets without or very little animal products, low-carbon sources of electricity and heating
15   at home as well as local holiday plans, can reduce an individual’s carbon footprint by up to 9tCO2-eq.
16   Realising these options requires substantial policy support to overcome infrastructural, institutional and
17   socio-cultural lock-in (see Sections 5.4 and 5.6).
18




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-43                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII




 1
 2    Figure 5.8 Synthesis of 60 demand side options ordered by the median GHG mitigation potential found
 3                                     across all estimates from the literature.
 4      The x-s are averages. The boxes represent the 25th percentile, median and 75th percentiles of study
 5     results. The whiskers or dots show the minimum and maximum mitigation potentials of each option.
 6    Negative values (in the red area) represent the potentials for backfire due to rebound, i.e. a net-increase
 7                                  of GHG emissions due to adopting the option.
 8                                            Source: Ivanova et al. 2020
 9
10   5.3.2 Technical tools to identify Avoid-Shift-Improve options
11   Service delivery systems to satisfy a variety of service needs (e.g., mobility, nutrition, thermal comfort,
12   etc.) comprise a series of interlinked processes to convert primary resources (e.g. coal, minerals) into
13   useable products (e.g. electricity, copper wires, lamps, light bulbs). It is useful to differentiate between
14   conversion and processing steps “upstream” of end-users (mines, power plants, manufacturing
15   facilities) and “downstream”, i.e. those associated with end-users, including service levels, and direct
16   well-being benefits for people (Kalt et al. 2019). Illustrative examples of such resource processing
17   systems steps and associated conversion losses drawn from the literature are shown in Figure 5.9. in the
18   form of resource processing cascades for energy (direct energy conversion efficiencies (Nakićenović et
19   al. 1993; De Stercke 2014)), water use in food production systems (water use efficiency and embodied
20   water losses in food delivery and consumption (Lundqvist et al. 2008; Sadras et al. 2011)), and materials



     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-44                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                    Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   (Ayres and Simonis 1994; Fischer-Kowalski et al. 2011) using the example of steel manufacturing, use
 2   and recycling at the global level (Allwood and Cullen 2012). Invariably, conversion losses along the
 3   entire service delivery systems are substantial, ranging from 83% (water) to 86% (energy) and 87%
 4   (steel) of primary resource inputs (TWI2050 2018). In other words, only between 14 to 17% of the
 5   harnessed primary resources remain at the level of ultimate service delivery.
 6




 7
 8
 9      Figure 5.9 Resource processing steps and efficiency cascades (in percent of primary resource inputs
10    [vertical axis] remaining at respective step until ultimate service delivery) for illustrative global service
11   delivery systems for energy (top panel, disaggregated into three sectorial service types and the aggregate
12   total), food (middle panel, water use in agriculture and food processing, delivery and use), and materials
13    (bottom panel, example steel). The aggregate efficiencies of service delivery chains is with 13-17% low.
14                                              Source: TWI2050 2018




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-45                                   Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   Examples of conversion losses at the supply side of resource processing systems include for instance
 2   for energy electricity generation (global output/input conversion efficiency of electric plants of 45% as
 3   shown in energy balance statistics (IEA 2020b); for water embodied in food irrigation water use
 4   efficiency (some 40% (Sadras et al. 2011)) and calorific conversion efficiency (food calories out/food
 5   calories in) in meat production of 60% (Lundqvist et al. 2008), or for materials where globally only
 6   47% or primary iron ore extracted and recovered steel scrap end up as steel in purchased products, (i.e.
 7   a loss of 57%) (Allwood and Cullen 2012).
 8
 9   A substantial part of losses happen at the end-use point and in final service delivery (where losses
10   account for 47 to 60% of aggregate systems losses for steel and energy respectively, and for 23% in the
11   case of water embodied in food, i.e. food waste). The efficiency of service delivery (for a detailed
12   discussion cf. (Brand-Correa and Steinberger 2017)) has usually both a technological component
13   (efficiency of end-use devices such as cars, light bulbs) and a behavioural component (i.e. how
14   efficiently end-use devices are used, e.g. load factors, for a discussion of such behavioural efficiency
15   improvement options see e.g. (Dietz et al. 2009; Laitner et al. 2009; Ehrhardt-Martinez 2015; Kane and
16   Srinivas 2014; Lopes et al. 2017; Thaler 2015; Norton 2012). Using the example of mobility where
17   service levels are usually expressed by passenger-km, the service delivery efficiency is thus a function
18   of the fuel efficiency of the vehicle and its drivetrain (typically only about 20%-25% for internal
19   combustion engines, but close to 100% for electric motors) plus how many passengers the vehicle
20   actually transports (load factor, typically as low as 20%-25%, i.e. one passenger per vehicle that could
21   seat 4-5), i.e. an aggregate end-use efficiency of between 4-6% only. Aggregated energy end-use
22   efficiencies at the global level are estimated as low as 20% (De Stercke 2014), 13% for steel (recovered
23   post-use scrap, Allwood and Cullen, 2012), and some 70% for food (including distribution losses and
24   food wastes of some 30%, (Lundqvist et al. 2008).
25
26   To harness additional gains in efficiency by shifting the focus in service delivery systems to the end-
27   user can translate into large “upstream” resource reductions. For each unit of improvement at the end-
28   use point of the service delivery system (examples shown in Figure 5.9), primary resource inputs are
29   reduced between a factor of 6 to 7 units (water, steel, energy) (TWI2050 2018). For example, reducing
30   energy needs for final service delivery equivalent to 1 EJ, reduces primary energy needs by some 7 EJ.
31   There is thus high evidence and high agreement in the literature that the leverage effect for
32   improvements in end-use service delivery efficiency through behavioural, technological, and market
33   organisational innovations is very large, ranging from a factor 6-7 (resource cascades) to up to a factor
34   10 to 20 (exergy analysis) with the highest improvement potentials at the end-user and service
35   provisioning levels (for systemic reviews see (Nakićenović et al. 1996a; Grubler et al. 2012b; Sousa et
36   al. 2017). Also the literature shows high agreement that current conversion efficiencies are invariably
37   low, particularly for those components at the end-use and service delivery back end of service
38   provisioning systems. It also suggests that efficiencies might be actually even lower than those revealed
39   by direct input-output resource accounting as discussed above (Figure 5.9). Illustrative exergy
40   efficiencies of entire national or global service delivery systems range from 2.5% (USA, (Ayres 1989))
41   to 5% (OECD average, (Grubler et al. 2012b)) and 10% (global, Nakićenović et al., 1996) respectively.
42   Studies that adopt more restricted systems boundaries either leaving out upstream resource
43   processing/conversion or conversely end-use and service provision, show typical exergetic efficiencies
44   between 15% (city of Geneva, cf. (Grubler et al. 2012a)) to below 25% (Japan, Italy, and Brazil, albeit
45   with incomplete systems coverage that miss important conversion losses (Nakićenović et al. 1996b)).
46   These findings are confirmed by more recent exergy efficiency studies that also include longitudinal
47   time trend analysis (Cullen and Allwood 2010; Serrenho et al. 2014; Guevara et al. 2016; Brockway et
48   al. 2014, 2015). Figure 5.10 illustrates how energy demand reductions can be realized by improving the
49   resource efficiency cascades shown in Figure 5.9 above.
50


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-46                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                    Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII




 1
 2
 3    Figure 5.10 Realisable energy efficiency improvements by region and by end-use type between 2020 and
 4     2050 in an illustrative Low Energy Demand scenario (in EJ). Efficiency improvements are decomposed
 5   by respective steps in the conversion chain from primary energy to final, and useful energy, and to service
 6    delivery and disaggregated by region (developed and developing countries) and end-use type (buildings,
 7     transport, materials). Improvements are dominated by improved efficiency in service delivery (153 EJ)
 8         and by more efficient end-use energy conversion (134 EJ). Improvements in service efficiency in
 9      transport shown here are conservative in this scenario but could be substantially higher with the full
10   adoption of integrated urban shared mobility schemes. Increases in energy use due to increases in service
11    levels and system effects of transport electrification (grey bars on top of first pair in the bar charts) that
12     counterbalance some of the efficiency improvements are also shown. Examples of options for efficiency
13    improvements and decision involved (grey text in the chart), the relative weight of generic demand-side
14      strategies (improve, shift, avoid blue arrows), as well as prototype actors involved are also illustrated
15                                       Data: Figure 5.9 and Grubler et al. 2018.

16
17   5.3.3 Low demand scenarios
18   Long-term mitigation scenarios play a crucial role in climate policy design in the near term, by
19   illuminating transition pathways, interactions between supply-side and demand-side interventions, their
20   timing, and the scales of required investments needed to achieve mitigation goals (see Chapter 3).
21   Historically, most long-term mitigation scenarios have taken technology-centric approaches with heavy
22   reliance on supply-side solutions and the use of carbon dioxide removal, particularly in 1.5oC scenarios
23   (Rogelj et al. 2018). Comparatively less attention has been paid to deep demand-side reductions
24   incorporating socio-cultural change and the cascade effects (see Section 5.3.2) associated with ASI
25   strategies, primarily due to limited past representation of such service-oriented interventions in long-
26   term integrated assessment models (IAMs) and energy systems models (ESMs) (Napp et al. 2019; van


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-47                                   Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   de Ven et al. 2018; Grubler et al. 2018). There is ample evidence of savings from sector- or issue-
 2   specific bottom-up studies (see Section 5.3.1.2). However, these savings typically get lost in the
 3   dominant narrative provided by IAMs and ESMs and in their aggregate-level evaluations of
 4   combinations of ASI and efficiency strategies. As a result, their interaction effects do not typically get
 5   equal focus alongside supply-side and carbon dioxide removal options (Van den Berg et al. 2019; Van
 6   Vuuren et al. 2018; Samadi et al. 2017).
 7
 8   In response to 1.5oC ambitions, and a growing desire to identify participatory pathways with less
 9   reliance on carbon dioxide removal with high uncertainty, some recent IAM and ESM mitigation
10   scenarios have explored the role of deep demand-side energy and resource use reduction potentials at
11   global and regional levels. Table 5.2 summarises long-term scenarios that aimed to: minimise service-
12   level energy and resource demand as a central mitigation tenet; specifically evaluate the role of
13   behavioural change and ASI strategies; and/or to achieve a carbon budget with limited/no carbon
14   dioxide removal. From assessment of this emerging body of literature, several general observations
15   arise and are presented below.
16
17   First, socio-cultural changes within transition pathways can offer Gigaton-scale CO2 savings potential
18   at the global level, and therefore represent a substantial overlooked strategy in traditional mitigation
19   scenarios. Two lifestyle change scenarios conducted with the IMAGE IAM suggested that behaviour
20   and cultural changes such heating and cooling set-point adjustments, shorter showers, reduced appliance
21   use, shifts to public transit, less meat intensive diets, and improved recycling can deliver an additional
22   1.7 Gt and 3 GtCO2 savings in 2050, beyond the savings achieved in traditional technology-centric
23   mitigation scenarios for the 2oC and 1.5oC ambitions, respectively (van Sluisveld et al. 2016; Van
24   Vuuren et al. 2018). In its Sustainable Development Scenario, the IEA’s behavioural change and
25   resource efficiency wedges deliver around 3 GtCO2-eq reduction in 2050, combined savings roughly
26   equivalent to those of solar PV that same year (IEA 2019a). In Europe, a GCAM scenario evaluating
27   combined lifestyle changes such as teleworking, travel avoidance, dietary shifts, food waste reductions,
28   and recycling reduced cumulative EU-27 CO2 emissions 2011-2050 by up to 16% compared to an SSP2
29   baseline (van de Ven et al. 2018). Also in Europe, a multi-regional input-output analysis suggested that
30   adoption of low-carbon consumption practices could reduce carbon footprints by 25%, or 1.4 Gt (Moran
31   et al. 2020). A global transport scenario suggests that transport sector emission can decline from
32   business as usual 18 GtCO2-eq to 2 GtCO2-eq if ASI strategies are deployed (Gota et al. 2019), a value
33   considerably below the estimates provided in IAM scenarios that have limited or no resolution in ASI
34   strategies (compare with Chapter 10).
35
36   The IEA’s Net Zero Emissions by 2050 (NZE) scenario, in which behavioural changes lead to 1.7
37   GtCO2 savings in 2030, expresses the substantial mitigation opportunity in terms of low-carbon
38   technology equivalencies: to achieve same emissions reductions, the global share of EVs in the NZE
39   would have to increase from 20% to 45% by 2030 or the number of installed heat pumps in homes in
40   the NZE would have to increase from 440 to 660 million in 2030 (IEA 2021).
41   In light of the limited number of mitigation scenarios that represent socio-behavioural changes
42   explicitly, there is medium evidence in the literature that such changes can reduce emissions at regional
43   and global levels, but high agreement within that literature that such changes hold up to gigaton-scale
44   CO2 emissions reduction potentials.
45
46   Second, pursuant to the ASI principle, deep demand reductions require parallel pursuit of behavioural
47   change and advanced energy efficient technology deployment; neither is sufficient on its own. The LED
48   scenario (Figure 5.10) combines behavioural and technological change consistent with numerous ASI
49   strategies that leverage digitalisation, sharing, and circular economy megatrends to deliver decent living
50   standards while reducing global final energy demand in 2050 to 245 EJ (Grubler et al. 2018). This value


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-48                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII

 1   is 40% lower than final energy demand in 2018 (IEA 2019a), and a lower 2050 outcome than other
 2   IAM/ESM scenarios with primarily technology-centric mitigation approaches (IEA 2017b; Teske et al.
 3   2015). In the IEA’s B2DS scenario, avoid/shift in the transport sector accounts for around 2 GtCO2-eq
 4   yr-1 in 2060, whereas parallel vehicle efficiency improvements increase the overall mitigation wedge to
 5   5.5 GtCO2-eq yr-1 in 2060 (IEA 2017b). Through a combination of behavioural change and energy
 6   efficient technology adoption, the IEA’s NZE requires only 340 EJ of global final energy demand with
 7   universal energy access in 2050, which is among the lowest of IPCC net zero SR1.5 scenarios (IEA
 8   2021).
 9
10   Third, low demand scenarios can reduce both supply side capacity additions and the need for carbon
11   capture and removal technologies to reach emissions targets. Of the scenarios listed in Table 5.2 one
12   (LED-MESSAGE) reaches 2050 emissions targets with no carbon capture or removal technologies
13   (Grubler et al. 2018), whereas others report significant reductions in reliance on bioenergy with carbon
14   capture and storage (BECCS) compared to traditional technology-centric mitigation pathways (Liu et
15   al. 2018; Van Vuuren et al. 2018; Napp et al. 2019), with the IEA’s NZE notably requiring the least
16   carbon dioxide removal (CDR) (1.8 Gt in 2050) and primary bioenergy (100 EJ in 2050) compared to
17   IPCC net zero SR1.5 scenarios (IEA 2021).
18
19   Fourth, the costs of reaching mitigation targets may be lower when incorporating ASI strategies for
20   deep energy and resource demand reductions. The TIAM-Grantham low demand scenarios displayed
21   reduction in mitigation costs (0.87–2.4% of GDP), while achieving even lower cumulative emissions
22   to 2100 (228 to ~475 GtCO2) than its central demand scenario (741 to 1066 GtCO2), which had a cost
23   range of (2.4–4.1% of GDP) (Napp et al. 2019). The GCAM behavioural change scenario concluded
24   that domestic emission savings would contribute to reduce the costs of achieving the internationally
25   agreed climate goal of the EU by 13.5% to 30% (van de Ven et al. 2018). The AIMS lifestyle case
26   indicated that mitigation costs, expressed as global GDP loss, would be 14% lower than the SSP2
27   reference scenario in 2100, for both 2oC and 1.5oC mitigation targets (Liu et al. 2018). These findings
28   mirror earlier AIM results, which indicated lower overall mitigation costs for scenarios focused on
29   energy service demand reductions (Fujimori et al. 2014). In the IEA’s NZE, behavioural changes that
30   avoid energy and resource demand save USD4 trillion (cumulatively 2021-2050) compared to if those
31   emissions reductions were achieved through low‐carbon electricity and hydrogen deployment (IEA
32   2021).
33
34   Based on the limited number of long-term mitigation scenarios that explicitly represent demand
35   reductions enabled by ASI strategies, there is medium evidence but with high agreement within that
36   literature that such scenarios can reduce dependence on supply-side capacity additions and carbon
37   capture and removal technologies with opportunity for lower overall mitigation costs.
38
39   If the limitations within most IAMs and ESMs regarding non-inclusion of granular ASI strategy analysis
40   can be addressed, it will expand and improve long-term mitigation scenarios (Van den Berg et al. 2019).
41   These include broader inclusion of mitigation costs for behavioural interventions (van Sluisveld et al.
42   2016), much greater incorporation of rebound effects (Krey et al. 2019), including from improved
43   efficiencies (Brockway et al. 2021) and avoided spending (van de Ven et al. 2018), improved
44   representation of materials cycle to assess resource cascades (Pauliuk et al. 2017), broader coverage of
45   behavioural change (Samadi et al. 2017; Saujot et al. 2020), improved consideration of how economic
46   development affects service demand (Semieniuk et al. 2021), explicit representation of intersectoral
47   linkages related to digitalisation, sharing economy, and circular economy strategies (see Section 5.3.4),
48   and institutional, political, social, entrepreneurial, and cultural factors (van Sluisveld et al. 2018).
49   Addressing the current significant modelling limitations will require increased investments in data
50   generation and collection, model development, and inter-model comparisons, with a particular focus


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-49                                 Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                Chapter 5                           IPCC AR6 WGIII

1   on socio-behavioural research that has been underrepresented in mitigation research funding to date
2   (Overland and Sovacool 2020).
3
4   Covid-19 interacts with demand-side scenarios (Box 5.2). Energy demand will mostly likely be reduced
5   between 2020 and 2030 compared to default pathway, and if recovery is steered towards low energy
6   demand, carbon prices for a 1.5 °C-consistent pathway will be by 19%, energy supply investments until
7   2030 by USD1.8 trillion reduced, and the pressure to rapidly upscale renewable energy technologies
8   will be softened (Kikstra et al. 2021a).
9




    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                5-50                               Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

1                         Table 5.2 Summary of long-term scenarios with elements that aimed to minimise service-level energy and resource demand

     Global scenarios

     #      Scenario           IAM/        Final                  Focused demand reduction element(s)                          Baseline     Mitigation potentialc
            [Temp]             ESM        energy                                                                               scenario
                                                       Scope      Sectorsa        Key demand reduction measures                            CO2      Final   Primary
                                                                                       considered (A, S, I) b                              (Gt)    energy    energy

     a   Lifestyle          IMAGE         -         Whole         R, T, I    A: Set points, smaller houses, reduced          2oC           1.9        -         -
         change                                     scenario                 shower times, wash temperatures, standby        technology-
         scenario [2oC]                                                      loss, reduced car travel, reduced plastics      centric
                                                                             S: from cars to bikes, rail                     scenario in
                                                                             I: improved plastic recycling                   2050

     b   Sustainable        World         398 EJ    Behavioural   T, I       A: shift from cars to mass transit, building    Stated         3         -         -
         Development        Energy        in 2040   change                   lifespan extension, materials efficient         policies in
         Scenario           Model                   wedge and                construction, product reuse                     2050
         [1.8oC]            (WEM)                   resource                 I: improved recycling
                                                    efficiency
                                                    wedge

     c   Beyond 2           ETP-          377 EJ    Transport     T, I       A: shorter car trips, optimised truck routing   Stated        2.8        -         -
         Degrees            TIMES         in 2050   avoid/shift              and utilisation                                 policies in
         Scenario                                   wedge and                S: shifts from cars to mass transit             2060
         [1.75oC]                                   material                 I: plastics and metal recycling, production
                                                    efficiency               yield improvements
                                                    wedge

     d   Lifestyle          IMAGE         322 EJ    Whole         R, C, T,   A: Set points, reduced appliance use            1.5oC         3.1        -         -
         change                           in 2050   scenario      I          S: from cars to mass transit, less meat         technology-
         scenario                                                            intensive diets, cultured meat                  centric
         [1.5oC]                                                             I: best available technologies across sectors   scenario in
                                                                                                                             2050




    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-51                                   Total pages: 192
Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII

 e   Low Energy       MESSAGE        245 EJ    Whole       R, C, T,   A: device integration, telework, shared         Final energy      -      179 EJ     -
     Demand                          in 2050   scenario    I, F       mobility, material efficiency,                  in 2020
     Scenario                                                         dematerialisation, reduced paper
     [1.5oC]                                                          S: multi-purpose dwellings, healthier diets
                                                                      I: best available technologies across sectors


 f   Advanced         -              279 EJ    Whole       R, C, T,   S: shifts from cars to mass transit             Continuation      -      260 EJ     -
     Energy                          in 2050   scenario    I          I: best available technologies across sectors   of current
     [R]evolution                                                                                                     trends and
                                                                                                                      policies in
                                                                                                                      2050

 g   Limited          IMAGE          -         Whole       R, C, T,   A: Set points, reduced appliance use            1.5oC           2.2 Gt     -      82 EJ
     BECCS –                                   scenario    F          S: from cars to mass transit, less meat         technology-
     lifestyle                                                        intensive diets, cultured meat                  centric
     change [1.5oC]                                                   I: best available technologies across sectors   scenario in
                                                                                                                      2050

 h   Lifestyle        AIM            374 EJ    Whole       T, I, F    A: reduced transport services demand,           1.5oC supply      -      42 EJ      -
     scenario                        in 2050   scenario               reduced demand for industrial goods             technology-
     [1.5oC]                                                          S: less meat-intensive diets                    centric
                                                                                                                      scenario in
                                                                                                                      2050

 i   Transport        Bottom-up      -         Whole       T          A: multiple options                                             89% vs     -        -
     scenario         construction             scenario               S: multiple options                                              BAU:
     [1.5oC]                                                          I: multiple options                                            16GtCO2

 j   Net Zero         World          -         Behaviour   R, T       A: Set points, line drying, reduced wash        Stated            2        -        -
     Emissions        Energy                   change                 temperatures, telework, reduced air travel      policies in
     2050 scenario    Model                    wedge                  S: shifts to walking, cycling                   2030
                      (WEM)                                           I: eco-driving

 k   Decent living    Bottom-up      149 EJ    Whole       R, T, I,   A: activity levels for mobility, shelter,       IEA Stated        -      75%        -
     with minimum     construction   in 2050   scenario    F          nutrition, etc. consistent with decent living   Policies
     energy                                                           standards                                       Scenario in
                                                                      S: shifts away from animal-based foods,         2050
                                                                      shifts to public transit, more



Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-52                                 Total pages: 192
Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

                                                                       I: energy efficiency consistent with best
                                                                       available technologies

 l   Net‐Zero          Hybrid     340 EJ      Behavioural   R, C, T,   A: heating, air conditioning, and hot water set   Stated         2.6   37 EJ
     Emissions by      model      in 2050     change        I          points, reduce international flights, line        policies in
     2050 Scenario     based on               reductions               drying, vehicle light-weighting, materials-       2050
     (NZE)             WEM and                                         efficient construction, building lifespan
                       ETP-                                            extension
                       TIMES                                           S: shift regional flights to high-speed rail,
                                                                       shift cars to walking, cycling or public
                                                                       transport,
                                                                       I: eco-driving, plastics recycling
 Regional scenarios

 m   Urban             -          540 EJ      Whole         R, C, T    A: reduced transport demand                       Current         -    180 EJ   -
     mitigation                   in          scenario                 S: mixed-use developments                         trends to
     wedge                        global                               I: vehicle efficiency, building codes and         2050
                                  cities in                            retrofits
                                  2050

 n   France 2072       TIMES-Fr   4.2 EJ      Whole         R, T       A: less travel by car and plane, longer           Final energy    -    1.7 EJ   -
     collective                   in          scenario                 building and device lifespans, less spending      in 2014
     society                      France                               S: shared housing, shifts from cars to
                                  in 2072                              walking, biking, mass transit

 o   EU-27 lifestyle   GCAM       -           Whole         R, T, F    A: telework, avoid short flights, closer          SSP2,          16%     -      -
     change –                                 scenario                 holidays, food waste reduction, car sharing,      cumulative
     enthusiastic                                                      set points                                        emissions
     profile                                                           S: vegan diet, shifts to cycling and public       2011-2050
                                                                       transit
                                                                       I: eco-driving, composting, paper, metal,
                                                                       plastic, and glass recycling
 p   Europe broader    IMAGE      35 EJ       Whole         R, T       A: reduced passenger and air travel, smaller      SSP2 in 2050    -    10 EJ    -
     regime change                in EU       scenario                 dwellings, fewer appliances, reduced shower
     scenario                     in 2050                              times, set points, avoid standby losses
                                                                       S: car sharing, shifts to public transit
                                                                       I: best available technologies




Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                5-53                                   Total pages: 192
Final Government Distribution         Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII

 q   EU Carbon-    EXIOBASE       -   Whole         R, T, F    90 demand-side behaviour change                   Present day     1.4    -      -
     CAP           3 MRIO             scenario                 opportunities spanning A-S-I including            consumption
                                                               changes to consumption patterns, reducing         footprint
                                                               consumption, and switching to using goods
                                                               with a lower-carbon production and low-
                                                               carbon use phases.

 r   France        Bottom-up          Sufficiency   R, C, T,   A: increase building capacity utilisation,        Business as      -     -     ~500
     “Negawatt”    construction       wedge         I, F       reduced appliance use, carsharing, telework,      usual in 2050                TWh
     scenario                                                  reduced goods consumption, less packaging         (~2300 TWh
                                                               S: shift to attached buildings; shift from cars   primary
                                                               and air to public transit and active mobility,    energy)
                                                               carsharing, freight shift to rail and water,
                                                               shift away from animal proteins
                                                               I: reduced speed limits, vehicle efficiency,
                                                               increased recycling

 s   The           BENCH-         -   Individual    R          A: reduce energy consumption through              SSP2 in 2030    50%    -      -
     Netherlands   NLD agent-         energy                   changing lifestyle, habits and consumption
     households    based              behavioural              patterns
     energy        model              changes                  S: to green energy provider; investment on
     behavioural                      and social               solar PVs (prosumers)
     changes                          dynamics;                I: investment on insulation and energy-
                                      considering              efficient appliances
                                      carbon
                                      pricing
 t   The           BENCH-         -   Individual    R          A: reduce energy consumption                      SSP2 in 2050    56%    51-
     Netherlands   NLD agent-         energy                   S: investment on solar PVs (prosumers)                                  71%
     households    based              behavioural              I: investment on insulation and energy-
     energy        model              changes                  efficient appliances
     behavioural                      and social
     changes                          dynamics

 u   Spain         BENCH-         -   Individual    R          A: reduce energy consumption                      SSP2 in 2050    44%    16-
     households    ESP agent-         energy                   S: investment on solar PVs (prosumers)                                  64%
     energy        based              behavioural              I: investment on insulation and energy-
     behavioural   model              changes                  efficient appliances
     changes                          and social
                                      dynamics


Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute        5-54                                   Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                      Chapter 5                                 IPCC AR6 WGIII


     v    A Societal         Global          187 EJ     Whole          R,C,I,F     A: reduce energy, material and land use           n/a              Down to
          Transformation     calculator      in 2050    scenario                   consumption                                                          9.1
          Scenario for                                                                                                                                GtCO2
          Staying Below                                                                                                                               in 2050
          1.5°C

1   Sources: a (van Sluisveld et al. 2016), b (IEA 2019a), c (IEA 2017b), d (Van Vuuren et al. 2018), e (Grubler et al. 2018), f (Teske et al. 2015), g (Esmeijer et al. 2018), h (Liu
2   et al. 2018), i (Gota et al. 2019), j (IEA 2020a), k (Millward-Hopkins et al. 2020), l (IEA 2021), m (Creutzig et al. 2015b), n (Millot et al. 2018), o (van de Ven et al. 2018), p
3   (van Sluisveld et al. 2018), q (Moran et al. 2020), r (Negawatt 2018), s (Niamir et al. 2020c), t,u (Niamir et al. 2020a), v (Kuhnhenn et al. 2020)
4   a
      R = residential (Chapters 8, 9); C = commercial (Chapters 8, 9), T = transport (Chapters 8, 10), I = industry (Chapter 11), F = food (Chapters 6, 12),
5   b
      A= avoid; S = shift, I = improve
6   c
      Relative to indicated baseline scenario value in stated year




    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                       5-55                                    Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   5.3.4 Transformative megatrends
 2   The sharing economy, the circular economy, and digitalisation have all received much attention from
 3   the research, advocacy, business models and policy communities as potentially transformative trends
 4   for climate change mitigation (TWI2050 2019; IEA 2017a; Material Economics 2018). All are
 5   essentially emerging and contested concepts (Gallie 1955) that have the common goal of increasing
 6   convenience for users and rendering economic systems more resource-efficient, but which exhibit
 7   variability in the literature on their definitions and system boundaries. Historically, both sharing and
 8   circular economies have been commonplace in developing countries, where reuse, repair, and waste
 9   scavaging and recycling comprise the core of informal economies facilitated by human interventions
10   (Wilson et al. 2006; Asim et al. 2012; Pacheco et al. 2012). Digitalisation is now propelling sharing and
11   circular economy concepts in developed and developing countries alike (Roy et al. 2021), and the three
12   megatrends are highly interrelated, as seen in Figure 5.11. For example, many sharing economy
13   concepts rely on corporate or, to lesser degree, non-profit digital platforms that enable efficient
14   information and opportunity sharing, thus making it part of the digitalisation trend. Parts of the sharing
15   economy are also included in some circular economy approaches, as shared resource use renders
16   utilisation of material more efficient. Digital approaches to material management also support the
17   circular economy, such as through waste exchanges and industrial symbiosis. Digitalisation aims more
18   broadly to deliver services in more efficient, timely, intelligent, and less resource-intensive ways (i.e.,
19   by moving bits and not atoms), though the use of increasingly interconnected physical and digital
20   systems in many facets of economies. With rising digitalisation also comes the risk of increased
21   electricity use to power billions of devices and the internet infrastructure that connects them, as well as
22   growing quantities of e-waste, presenting an important policy agenda for monitoring and balancing the
23   carbon and resource costs and benefits of digitalisation (Malmodin and Lundén 2018; TWI2050 2019).
24   Rebound effects and instigated consumption of digitalisation are risking to lead to a net increase in
25   GHG emissions (Belkhir and Elmeligi 2018). The determinants and possible scales of mitigation
26   potentials associated with each megatrend are discussed below.
27




28
29   Figure 5.11 The growing nexus between digitalisation, the sharing economy, and the circular economy in
30   service delivery systems. While these trends started mostly independently, rapid digitalisation is creating
31      new synergistic opportunities with systemic potential to improve the quality of jobs, particularly in

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-56                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1    developing economies. Widespread digitalisation may lead to net increases in electricity use, demand for
 2      electronics manufacturing resources, and e-waste, all of which must be monitored and managed via
 3                                              targeted policies
 4
 5   5.3.4.1   Digitalisation
 6   In the context of service provision, there are numerous opportunities for consumers to buy, subscribe
 7   to, adopt, access, install or use digital goods and services (Wilson et al. 2020b). Digitalisation has
 8   opened up new possibilities across all domains of consumer activity, from travel and retail to domestic
 9   living and energy use. Digital platforms allow surplus resources to be identified, offered , shared,
10   transacted and exchanged (Frenken 2017). Real-time information flows on consumers’ preferences and
11   needs mean service provision can be personalised, differentiated, automated, and optimised (TWI2050
12   2019). Rapid innovation cycles and software upgrades drive continual improvements in performance
13   and responsiveness to consumer behaviour. These characteristics of digitalisation enable new business
14   models and services that affect both service demand, from shared-ridehailing (ITF 2017a) to smart
15   heating (IEA 2017a), and how services are provisioned, from online farmers’ markets (Richards and
16   Hamilton 2018) to peer-to-peer electricity trading to enable distributed power systems (Morstyn et al.
17   2018).
18   In many cases, digitalisation provides a ‘radical functionality’ that enables users to do or accomplish
19   something that they could not do before (Nagy et al. 2016). Indeed the consumer appeal of digital
20   innovations varies widely, from choice, convenience, flexibility and control to relational and social
21   benefits (Pettifor and Wilson 2020). Reviewing over 30 digital goods and services for mobility, food
22   buying and domestic living, Wilson et al. (2020b)also found shared elements of appeal across multiple
23   innovations including (i) making use of surplus, (ii) using not owning, (iii) being part of wider networks,
24   and (iv) exerting greater control over service provisioning systems. Digitalisation thus creates a strong
25   value proposition for certain consumer niches. Concurrent diffusion of many digital innovations
26   amplifies their disruptive potential (Schuelke-Leech 2018; Wilson et al. 2019b). Besides basic mobile
27   telephone service for communication, digital innovations have been primarily geared to population
28   groups with high purchasing power, and too little to the needs of poor and vulnerable people.
29
30   The long-term sustainability implications of digitalised services hinge on four factors: (1) the direct
31   energy demands of connected devices and the digital infrastructures (i.e. data centres and
32   communication networks) that provide necessary computing, storage, and communication services
33   (Chapter 9.4.6); (2) the systems-level energy and resource efficiencies that may be gained through the
34   provision of digital services (Wilson et al. 2020b); (3) the resource, material, and waste management
35   requirements of the billions of ICT devices that comprise the world’s digital systems (Belkhir and
36   Elmeligi 2018; Malmodin and Lundén 2018) and (4) the magnitude of potential rebound effects or
37   induced energy demands that might unleash unintended and unsustainable demand growth, such as
38   autonomous vehicles inducing more frequent and longer journeys due to reduced travel costs (Wadud
39   et al. 2016). Estimating digitalisation’s direct energy demand has historically been hampered by lack of
40   consistent global data on IT device stocks, their power consumption characteristics, and usage patterns,
41   for both consumer devices and the data centres and communication networks behind them. As a result,
42   quantitative estimates vary widely, with literature values suggesting that consumer devices, data
43   centres, and data networks account for anywhere from 6% to 12% of global electricity use (Gelenbe
44   and Caseau 2015; Cook et al. 2017; Malmodin and Lundén 2018). For example, within the literature on
45   data centres, top-down models that project energy use on the basis of increasing demand for internet
46   services tend to predict rapid global energy use growth, (Andrae and Edler 2015; Belkhir and Elmeligi
47   2018; Liu et al. 2020a), whereas bottom-up models that consider data center technology stocks and their
48   energy efficiency trends tend to predict slower but still positive growth (Hintemann and Hinterholzer
49   2019; Masanet et al. 2020; Shehabi et al. 2018; Malmodin 2020). Yet there is growing concern that

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-57                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   remaining energy efficiency improvements might be outpaced by rising demand for digital services,
 2   particularly as data-intensive technologies such as artificial intelligence, smart and connected energy
 3   systems, distributed manufacturing systems, and autonomous vehicles promise to increase demand for
 4   data services even further in the future (TWI2050 2019; Masanet et al. 2020; Strubell et al. 2020).
 5   Rapid digitalization is also contributing to an expanding e-waste problem, estimated to be the fastest
 6   growing domestic waste stream globally (Forti V., Baldé C.P., Kuehr R. 2020).
 7
 8   As digitalisation proliferates, an important policy objective is therefore to invest in data collection and
 9   monitoring systems and energy demand models of digitalised systems to guide technology and policy
10   investment decisions for addressing potential direct energy demand growth (IEA 2017a) and potentially
11   concomitant growth in e-waste.
12
13   However, the net systems-level energy and resource efficiencies gained through the provision of digital
14   services could play an important role in dealing with climate change and other environmental challenges
15   (Masanet and Matthews 2010; Melville 2010; Elliot 2011; Watson et al. 2012; Gholami et al. 2013;
16   Añón Higón et al. 2017). As shown in Figure 5.12, assessments of numerous digital service
17   opportunities for mobility, nutrition, shelter, and education and entertainment suggest that net emissions
18   benefits can be delivered at the systems level, although these effects are highly context-dependent.
19   Importantly, evidence of potential negative outcomes due to rebound effects, induced demand, or life-
20   cycle trade-offs can also be observed. For example, telework has been shown to reduce emissions where
21   long and/or energy-intensive commutes are avoided, but can lead to net emissions increases in cases
22   where greater non-work vehicle use occurs or only short, low-emissions commutes (e.g., via public
23   transit) are avoided (Viana Cerqueira et al. 2020; IEA 2020a; Hook et al. 2020). Similarly, substitution
24   of physical media by digital alternatives may lead to emissions increases where greater consumption is
25   fuelled, whereas a shift to 3D printed structures may require more emissions-intensive concrete
26   formulations or result in reduced thermal energy efficiency leading to life-cycle emissions increases
27   (Mahadevan et al. 2020; Yao et al. 2020).
28
29   Furthermore, digitalisation, automation and artificial intelligence, as general-purpose technologies, may
30   lead to a plethora of new products and applications that are likely to be efficient on their own but that
31   may also lead to undesirable changes or absolute increases in demand for products (Figure 5.12). For
32   example, last-mile delivery in logistics is both expensive and cumbersome. Battery-powered drones
33   enable a delivery of goods at similar life-cycle emissions to delivery vans (Stolaroff et al. 2018). At the
34   same time, drone delivery is cheaper in terms of time (immediate delivery) and monetary costs
35   (automation saves the highest cost component: personnel) (e.g. (Sudbury and Hutchinson 2016)). As a
36   result, demand for package delivery may increase rapidly. Similarly, automated vehicles reduce the
37   costs of time, parking, and personnel, and therefore may dramatically increase vehicle mileage (Wadud
38   et al. 2016; Cohen and Cavoli 2019). On-demand electric scooters offer mobility access preferable to
39   passenger cars, but can replace trips otherwise taken on public transit (de Bortoli and Christoforou
40   2020) and can come with significant additional energy requirements for night time system rebalancing
41   (Hollingsworth et al. 2019, ITF 2020). The energy requirements of cryptocurrencies is also a growing
42   concern, although considerable uncertainty exists surrounding the energy use of their underlying
43   blockchain infrastructure (Vranken 2017; de Vries 2018; Stoll et al. 2019). For example, while it is
44   clear that the energy requirements of global Bitcoin mining have grown significantly since 2017, recent
45   literature indicates a wide range of estimates for 2020 (47 TWh to 125 TWh) due to data gaps and
46   differences in modelling approaches (Lei et al. 2021). Initial estimates of the computational intensity
47   of artificial intelligence algorithms suggest that energy requirements may be enormous without
48   concerted effort to improve efficiencies, especially on the computational side (Strubell et al. 2020).


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-58                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                    Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   Efficiency gains enabled by digitalisation, in terms of reduced GHG emissions or energy use per service
 2   unit may be overcompensated by activity/scale effects.
 3




 4
 5
 6      Figure 5.12 Studies assessing net changes in CO2 emissions, energy use, and activity levels indicate
 7    mitigation potentials for numerous end user-oriented digitalisation solutions, but also risk of increased
 8               emissions due to inefficient substitutions, induced demand, and rebound effects.
 9     90 studies were assessed with 207 observations (indicated by vertical bars) including those based on
10   empirical research, attributional and consequential life-cycle assessments, and techno-economic analyses
11       and scenarios at different scales, which are not directly comparable but useful for indicating the
12                 directionality and determinants of net emissions, energy, and activity effects.
13   Sources: Erdmann and Hilty 2010; Gebler et al. 2014; Huang et al. 2016; Verhoef et al. 2018; Alhumayani et al.
14   2020; Court and Sorrell 2020; Hook et al. 2020; IEA 2020a; Saade et al. 2020; Torres-Carrillo et al. 2020; Yao
15                                et al. 2020; Wilson et al. 2020c; Muñoz et al. 2021
16
17   Maximising the mitigation potential of digitalisation trends involves diligent monitoring and proactive
18   management of both direct and indirect demand effects, to ensure that a proper balance is maintained.
19   Direct energy demand can be managed through continued investments in and incentives for energy-
20   efficient data centres, networks, and end-use devices (Masanet et al. 2011; Avgerinou et al. 2017; IEA
21   2017a; Koronen et al. 2020). Shifts to low-carbon power are a particularly important strategy being
22   undertaken by data centre and network operators (Cook et al. 2014; Huang et al. 2020), which might be
23   adopted across the digital device spectrum as a proactive mitigation strategy where data demands
24   outpace hardware efficiency gains, which may be approaching limits in the near future (Koomey et al.
25   2011). Most recently, data centres are being investigated as a potential resource for demand response

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-59                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   and load balancing in renewable power grids (Zheng et al. 2020; Koronen et al. 2020), while a large
 2   bandwidth for improving software efficiency has been suggested for overcoming slowing hardware
 3   efficiency gains (Leiserson et al. 2020). Ensuring efficiency benefits of digital services while avoiding
 4   potential rebound effects and demand surges will require early and proactive public policies to avoid
 5   excess energy use (WBGU 2019; TWI2050 2019), which will also necessitate investments in data
 6   collection and monitoring systems to ensure that net mitigation benefits are realised and that unintended
 7   consequences can be identified early and properly managed (IEA 2017a).
 8
 9   Within a small but growing body of literature on the net effects of digitalisation, there is medium
10   evidence that digitalised consumer services can reduce overall emissions, energy use, and activity
11   levels, with medium agreement on the scale of potential savings with the important caveat that induced
12   demand and rebound effects must be managed carefully to avoid negative outcomes.
13
14   5.3.4.2   The sharing economy
15   Opportunities to increase service per product includes peer-to-peer based sharing of goods and services
16   such as housing, mobility, and tools. Hence, consumable products become durable goods delivering a
17   “product service”, which potentially could provide the same level of service with fewer products
18   (Fischedick, M. et al. 2014).The sharing economy is an old practice of sharing assets between many
19   without transferring ownership, which has been made new through focuses on sharing underutilised
20   products/assets in ways that promotes flexibility and convenience, often in a highly developed context
21   via gig economy/ online platforms. However, sharing economy offers the potential to shift from ‘asset-
22   heavy’ ownership to ‘asset-light’ access, especially in developing countries (Retamal 2019). General
23   conclusions on the sharing economy as a framework for climate change mitigation are challenging and
24   are better broken down to specific subsystems (Mi and Coffman 2019). See more in Supplementary
25   Material I Chapter 5, SM.5.4.3.
26
27   Shared mobility
28   Shared mobility is characterised by the sharing of an asset (e.g., a bicycle, e-scooter, vehicle), and the
29   use of technology (i.e. apps and the Internet) to connect users and providers. It succeeded by identifying
30   market inefficiencies and transferring control over transactions to consumers. Even though most shared
31   mobility providers operate privately, their services can be considered as part of a public transport system
32   in so far as it is accessible to most transport users and does not require private asset ownership. Shared
33   mobility reduces GHG emissions if it substitutes for more GHG intensive travel (usually private car
34   travel) (Martin and Shaheen 2011; Shaheen and Cohen 2019; Shaheen and Chan 2016; Santos et al.
35   2018; Axsen and Sovacool 2019), and especially if it changes consumer behaviour in the long run “by
36   shifting personal transportation choices from ownership to demand-fulfilment” (Mi and Coffman 2019).
37
38   Demand is an important driver for energy use and emissions because decreased cost of travel time by
39   sharing an asset (e.g. vehicle) could lead to an increase in emissions, but a high level of vehicle sharing
40   could reduce negative impacts associated with this (Brown and Dodder 2019). One example is the
41   megacity Kolkata, India, which has as many as twelve different modes of public transportation options
42   that co-exist and offer means of mobility to its 14 million citizens (see Box 5.7). Most public transport
43   modes are shared mobility options ranging from sharing between two people in a rickshaw or between
44   a few hundred in metro or sub-urban trains. Sharing also happens informally as daily commuters avail
45   shared taxis and neighbours borrow each other’s car or bicycle for urgent or day trips.
46
47   Shared mobility using private vehicle assets is categorised into four models (Santos et al. 2018): peer-
48   to-peer (P2P) platforms where individuals can rent the vehicle when not in use (Ballús-Armet et al.
49   2014); short term rental managed and owned by a provider (Enoch and Taylor 2006; Schaefers et al.

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-60                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   2016; Bardhi and Eckhardt 2012); Uber-like ridehailing services (Wallsten 2015; Angrist et al. 2017);
 2   and ride pooling using private vehicles shared by passengers to a common destination (Liyanage et al.
 3   2019; Shaheen and Cohen 2019). The latest model – ride pooling – is promising in terms of congestion
 4   and per capita CO2 emissions reductions and is a common practice in developing countries, however is
 5   challenging in terms of waiting and travel time, comfort, and convenience, relative to private cars
 6   (Santos et al. 2018; Shaheen and Cohen 2019). The other three models often yield profits to private
 7   parties, but remain mostly unrelated to reduction in CO2 emissions (Santos et al. 2018). Shared travel
 8   models, especially Uber-like models, are criticised because of the flexibilisation of labour, especially
 9   in developing countries, in which unemployment rates and unregulated labour markets lie a foundation
10   of precarity that lead many workers to seek out wide-ranging means towards patching together a living
11   (Ettlinger 2017; Wells et al. 2020). Despite the advantages of the shared mobility such as convenience
12   and affordability, consumers may also perceive risk formed by possible physical injury from strangers
13   or unexpected poor service quality (Hong et al. 2019).
14
15   From a mitigation perspective, the current state of shared mobility looks at best questionable (Fishman
16   et al. 2014; Ricci 2015; Zhang et al. 2019; Zhang and Mi 2018; Creutzig et al. 2019b; Martin 2016; Mi
17   and Coffman 2019). Transport entrepreneurs and government officials often conflate ‘smart’ and
18   “shared’ vehicle with ‘sustainable’ mobility, a conflation not withstanding scrutiny (Noy and Givoni
19   2018). Surveys demonstrate that many users take free-floating car sharing instead of public transit,
20   rather than to replace their private car (Herrmann et al. 2014); while in the United States, ride hailing
21   and sharing data indicate that these services have increased road congestion and lowered transit
22   ridership, with an insignificant change in vehicle ownership, and may further lead to net increases in
23   energy use and CO2 emissions due to deadheading (Diao et al. 2021; Ward et al. 2021). If substitution
24   effects and deadheading, which is the practice of allowing employees of a common carrier to use a
25   vehicle as a non-revenue passenger, are accounted for, flexible motor-cycle sharing in Djakarta is at
26   best neutral to overall GHG emissions (Suatmadi et al. 2019). Passenger surveys conducted in Denver
27   indicated that around 22% of all trips travelled with Uber and Lyft would have been travelled by transit,
28   12% would have walked or biked, and another 12% of induced demand or passengers that would not
29   have travelled at all (Henao and Marshall 2019).
30
31   Positive effects can be realised directly in bike sharing due to its very low marginal transport emissions.
32   For example, in 2016, bike sharing in Shanghai reduced CO2 emissions by 25ktCO2 with additional
33   benefits to air quality (Zhang and Mi 2018). However, also bike-sharing can increase emissions from
34   motor vehicle usage when inventory management is not optimised during maintenance, collection, and
35   redistribution of dock-less bikes (Fishman et al. 2014; Zhang et al. 2019; Mi and Coffman 2019).
36
37   Shared mobility scenarios demonstrate that GHG emission reduction can be substantial when mobility
38   systems and digitalisation is regulated. Some studies model that ride pooling with electric cars (6 to 16
39   seats, which shifts the service to a more efficient transport mode (e.g., electric vehicle) and improves
40   its carbon intensity by cutting GHG emissions by one-third (International Transport Forum 2016), and
41   63-82% per mile compared to a privately owned hybrid vehicle in 2030, 87 to 94% lower than a
42   privately owned, gasoline-powered vehicle in 2014 (Greenblatt and Saxena 2015). This also realises
43   95% reduction in space required for public parking; total vehicle kilometres travelled would be 37%
44   lower than the present day, although each vehicle would travel ten times the total distance of current
45   vehicles (International Transport Forum 2016). Studies of Berlin and Lisbon demonstrate that sharing
46   strategies could reduce the number of cars by more than 90%, also saving valuable street space for
47   human-scale activity (Bischoff and Maciejewski 2016; Martinez and Viegas 2017; Creutzig et al.
48   2019b). The impacts will also depend on sharing levels – concurrent or sequential – and the future
49   modal split among public transit, automated electric vehicles fleets, and shared or pooled rides.
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-61                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   Evidence from attributional life-cycle assessments (LCAs) of ride-hailing, whether Uber-like or by taxi,
 2   suggests that the key determinants of net emissions effects are average vehicle occupancy and vehicle
 3   powertrain, with high-occupancy and electric drivetrain cars deliver the greatest emissions benefits,
 4   even rivalling traditional metro/urban rail and bus options (Figure 5.13b). It is possible that shared
 5   automated electric vehicles fleets could become widely used without many shared rides, and single or
 6   even zero occupant vehicles will continue to dominate the majority of vehicle trips. It is also feasible
 7   that shared rides could become more common, if automation makes route deviation more efficient, more
 8   cost-effective, and more convenient, increasing total travel substantially (Wadud et al. 2016). Car
 9   sharing with automated vehicles could even worsen congestion and emissions by generating additional
10   travel demand (Rubin et al. 2016). Travel time in autonomous vehicles can be used for other activities
11   but driving and travel costs are expected to decrease, which most likely will induce additional demand
12   for auto travel (Moeckel and Lewis 2017) and could even create incentives for further urban sprawl.
13   More generally, increased efficiency generated by big data and smart algorithms may generate rebound
14   effects in demand and potentially compromise the public benefits of their efficiency promise (Gossart
15   2015).
16
17   In many countries, shared mobility and ride pooling is often the norm. Here the challenge is to improve
18   service quality to keep users in shared mobility and public transport (see Box 5.7). A key barrier in
19   cities like Nairobi is the lack of public involvement of users and sustainability experts in designing
20   transport systems, leaving planning to transport engineers, and thus preventing inclusive shared
21   mobility system design (Klopp 2012).
22
23   Altogether, travel behaviour, business models, and especially public policy will be key components in
24   determining how pooling and shared automated electric vehicles impacts unfold (Shaheen and Cohen
25   2019). Urban-scale governance of smart mobility holds potential for prioritizing public transit and the
26   use of public spaces for human activities, managing the data as a digital sustainable commons (e.g., via
27   the installation of a Central Information Officer, as in Tel Aviv), and managing the social and
28   environmental risks of smart mobility to realise its benefits (Creutzig et al. 2019b). Pricing of energy
29   use and GHG emissions will be helpful to achieve these goals. The governance of shared mobility is
30   complicated, as it involves many actors, and is key to realise wider benefits of shared mobility
31   (Akyelken et al. 2018). New actors, networks and technologies enabling shared mobility are already
32   fundamentally challenging how transport is governed worldwide. This is not a debate about state versus
33   non-state actors but instead about the role the state takes within these new networks to steer, facilitate
34   and also reject different elements of the mobility system (Docherty et al. 2018).
35
36   Shared accommodation
37   In developing countries and in many student accommodations globally, shared accommodation allows
38   affordable housing for a large part of the population. For example, living arrangements are built
39   expressly around the practice of sharing toilets, bathrooms and kitchens. While the sharing of such
40   facilities does connote a lower level of service provision and quality of life, it provides access to a
41   consumer base with very low and unreliable incomes. Thus, sharing key facilities can help guarantee
42   the provision of affordable housing (Gulyani et al. 2018). In developed countries, large-scale
43   developments are targeting students and ‘young professionals’ by offering shared accommodation and
44   services. Historically shared accommodation has been part of the student life due to its flexible and
45   affordable characteristics. However, the expansion of housing supply through densification can use
46   shared facilities as an instrument to “commercialize small housing production, while housing
47   affordability and accessibility are threatened” (Uyttebrouck et al. 2020).
48


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-62                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   With respect to travel accommodations, several models are emerging in which accommodation is
 2   offered to, or shared with, travellers by private people organised by business-driven or non-profit online
 3   platforms. Accommodation sharing includes P2P, ICT-enabled, short-term renting, swapping,
 4   borrowing or lending of existing privately-owned idling lodging facilities (Voytenko Palgan et al. 2017;
 5   Möhlmann 2015).
 6
 7   With shared accommodation services via the platform economy, there may be risks of negative
 8   sustainability effects, such as rebound effects caused by increased travel frequency (Tussyadiah and
 9   Pesonen 2016). This is particularly a problem if apartments are removed from long-term rental markets,
10   thus indirectly inducing construction activities, with substantial GHG emissions on their own. However,
11   if a host shares their accommodation with a guest, the use of some resources, such as heating and
12   lighting, is shared, thereby leading to more efficient resource use per capita (Chenoweth 2009;
13   Voytenko Palgan et al. 2017). Given the nascence of shared accommodation via the platform economy,
14   quantifications of its systems-level energy and emissions impacts are lacking in the literature,
15   representing an important area for future study.
16
17   Mitigation potentials of sharing economy strategies
18   Sharing economy initiatives play a central role in enabling individuals to share underutilised products.
19   While the literature on the net effects of sharing economy strategies is still limited, available studies
20   have presented different mitigation potentials to date, as shown in Figure 5.13. For many sharing
21   economy strategies, there is a risk of negative rebound and induced demand effects, which may occur
22   by changing consuming patterns, e.g., if savings from sharing housing are used to finance air travel.
23   Thus, the mitigation potentials of sharing economy strategies will depend on stringent public policy and
24   consumer awareness that reigns in run-away consumption effects. Shared economy solutions generally
25   relate to the “Avoid” and “Shift” strategies (see Sections 5.1 and 5.3.2). On the one hand, they hold
26   potential for providing similar or improved services for well-being (mobility, shelter) at reduced energy
27   and resource input, with the proper policy signals and consumer responses. On the other hand, shared
28   economy strategies may increase emissions, e.g., shared mobility may shift activity away from public
29   transit and lead to lower vehicle occupancy, deadheading, and use of inefficient shared vehicles (Merlin
30   2019; Jones and Leibowicz 2019; Bonilla-Alicea et al. 2020; Ward et al. 2021). Similarly to
31   digitalisation, there is medium evidence that sharing economy can reduce overall emissions, energy use,
32   and activity levels, with medium agreement on the scale of potential savings if induced demand and
33   rebound effects can be carefully managed to avoid negative outcomes.
34




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-63                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                      Chapter 5                                IPCC AR6 WGIII




 1

                               (a)                                                       (b)
 2                                                       Figure 5.13
 3            (a) Published estimates from 72 studies with 185 observations (indicated by vertical bars) of the
 4               relative mitigation potential of different shared and circular economy strategies, demonstrating
 5              limited observations for many emerging strategies, a wide variance in estimated benefits for most
 6                    strategies, and within the sharing economy risk of increased emissions due to inefficient
 7                  substitutions, induced demand, and rebound effects. Mitigation potentials are conditional on
 8                     corresponding public policy and/or regulation. (b) Attributional LCA comparisons of
 9                ridesharing mobility options, which highlight the large effects of vehicle occupancy and vehicle
10                 technology on total CO2 emissions per passenger-km and the preferability of high-occupancy
11                and non-ICE configurations for emissions reductions compared to private cars. Also indicated
12               are possible emissions increases associated with shared car mobility when it substitutes for non-
13                                              motorised and public transit options.
14              BEV = battery electric vehicle; FCEV = fuel cell electric vehicle; HEV = hybrid electric vehicle;
15              ICE=internal combustion engine; PHEV = plug-in hybrid electric vehicle.
16   Sources: Jacobson and King 2009; Firnkorn and Müller 2011; Baptista et al. 2014; Liu et al. 2014; Nijland et al.
17   2015; Namazu and Dowlatabadi 2015; IEA 2016; Koh 2016; Martin and Shaheen 2016; Rabbitt and Ghosh 2016;
18   Bruck et al. 2017; Bullock et al. 2017; Clewlow and Mishra 2017; Fremstad 2017; ITF 2017a,b,c; Nijland and
19   van Meerkerk 2017; Nasir et al. 2017; Skjelvik et al. 2017; Yin et al. 2017; Campbell 2018; Ghisellini et al. 2018;
20   Favier et al. 2018; Hopkinson et al. 2018; IEA 2018; ITF 2018; Lokhandwala and Cai 2018; Malmqvist et al.
21   2018; Makov and Font Vivanco 2018; Material Economics 2018; Rademaekers et al. 2017; Nasr et al. 2018; Yu
22   et al. 2018; Zhang and Mi 2018; Brambilla et al. 2019; Brütting et al. 2019; Buyle et al. 2019; Castro and Pasanen
23   2019; Coulombel et al. 2019; Eberhardt et al. 2019; IEA 2019b; ITF 2019; Jones and Leibowicz 2019; Ludmann
24   2019; Merlin 2019; Nußholz et al. 2019; Bonilla-Alicea et al. 2020; Cantzler et al. 2020; Churkina et al. 2020;
25   Gallego-Schmid et al. 2020; Hertwich et al. 2020; ITF 2020a,b; Liang et al. 2020; Miller 2020; Wilson et al.
26   2020c; Yan et al. 2020; Cordella et al. 2021; Diao et al. 2021; Pauliuk et al. 2021; Ward et al. 2021; Wolfram et
27   al. 2021


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                      5-64                                    Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1
 2   The circular economy
 3   While the demands for energy and materials will increase until 2060 following the traditional linear
 4   model of production and consumption, resulting in serious environmental consequences (OECD
 5   2019b), the circular economy (CE) provides strategies for reducing societal needs for energy and
 6   primary materials to deliver the same level of service with lower environmental impacts. The CE
 7   framework embodies multiple schools of thought with roots in a number of related concepts (Blomsma
 8   and Brennan 2017; Murray et al. 2017), including cradle to cradle (McDonough and Braungart 2002),
 9   performance economy (Stahel 2016), biomimicry (Benyus 1997), green economy (Loiseau et al. 2016)
10   and industrial ecology (Saavedra et al. 2018). As a result, there are also many definitions of CE: a
11   systematic literature review identified 114 different definitions (Kirchherr et al. 2017). One of the most
12   comprehensive models is suggested by the Netherlands Environmental Assessment Agency (Potting et
13   al. 2018), which defines ten strategies for circularity: Refuse (R0), Rethink (R1), Reduce (R2), Reuse
14   (R3), Repair (R4), Refurbish (R5), Remanufacture (R6), Repurpose (R7), Recycle (R8), and Recover
15   energy (R9). Overall, the definition of CE is contested, with varying boundary conditions chosen. As
16   illustrated in Figure 5.11, the CE overlaps with both the sharing economy and digitalisation megatrends.
17
18   In line with the principles of SDG12 (responsible consumption and production), the essence of building
19   CE is to retain as much value as possible from products and components when they reach the end of
20   their useful life in a given application (Linder and Williander 2017; Lewandowski 2016; Lieder and
21   Rashid 2016; Stahel 2016). This requires an integrated approach during the design phase that, for
22   example, extends product usage and ensures recyclability after use (de Coninck et al. 2018). While
23   traditional “improve” strategies tend to focus on direct energy and carbon efficiency, service-oriented
24   strategies focus on reducing life-cycle emissions through harnessing the leverage effect (Creutzig et al.
25   2018). The development of closed-loop models in service-oriented businesses can increase resource and
26   energy efficiency, reducing emissions and contributing to climate change mitigation goals on national,
27   regional, and global levels (Johannsdottir 2014; Korhonen et al. 2018). Key examples include
28   remanufacturing of consumer products to extend lifespans while maintaining adequate service levels
29   (Klausner et al. 1998), reuse of building components to reduce demand for primary materials and
30   construction processes (Shanks et al. 2019), and improved recycling to reduce upstream resource
31   pressures (IEA 2019b, 2017b).
32
33   Among the many schools of thought on the CE and climate change mitigation, two different trends can
34   be distinguished from the literature to date. First, there are publications, many of them non peer-
35   reviewed, that eulogize the perceived benefits of the CE, but in many cases stop short of providing a
36   quantitative assessment. Promotion of CE from this perspective has been criticised as a greenwashing
37   attempt by industry to avoid serious regulation (Isenhour 2019). Second, there are more
38   methodologically rigorous publications, mostly originating in the industrial ecology field, but
39   sometimes investigating only limited aspects of the CE (Bocken et al. 2017; Cullen 2017; Goldberg
40   2017). Conclusions on CE’s mitigation potential also differ with diverging definitions of the CE. A
41   systematic review identified 3244 peer-reviewed articles addressing CE and climate change , but only
42   10% of those provide insights on how the CE can support mitigation, and most of them found only
43   small potentials to reduce GHG emissions (Cantzler et al. 2020). Recycling is the CE category most
44   investigated, while reuse and reduce strategies have seen comparatively less attention (Cantzler et al.
45   2020). However, mitigation potentials were also context- and material-specific, as illustrated by the
46   ranges shown in Figure 5.13a.
47
48   There are three key concerns relating to the effectiveness of the CE concept. First, many proposals on
49   the CE insufficiently reflect on thermodynamic constraints that limit the potential of recycling from

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-65                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   both mass conservation and material quality perspectives or ignore the considerable amount of energy
 2   needed so reuse materials (Cullen 2017). Second, demand for materials and resources will likely
 3   outpace efficiency gains in supply chains, becoming a key driver of GHG emissions and other
 4   environmental problems, rendering the CE alone an insufficient strategy to reduce emissions
 5   (Bengtsson et al. 2018). In fact, the empirical literature points out that only 6.5% of all processed
 6   materials (4 Gt yr-1) globally originate from recycled sources (Haas et al. 2015). The low degree of
 7   circularity is explained by the high proportion of processed materials (44%) used to provide energy thus
 8   not available for recycling; and the high rate of net additions to stocks of 17 Gt yr1. As long as long-
 9   lived material stocks (e.g., in buildings and infrastructure) continue to grow, strategies targeting end-
10   of-pipe materials cannot keep pace with primary materials demand (Krausmann et al. 2017; Haas et al.
11   2020). Instead, a significant reduction of societal stock growth, and decisive eco-design is suggested
12   to advance the CE (Haas et al. 2015). Third, cost-effectiveness underlying CE activities may
13   concurrently also increase energy intensity and reduce labour intensity, causing systematically
14   undesirable effects. To a large extent, the distribution of costs and benefits of material and energy use
15   depends on institutions in order to include demand-side solutions. Thus, institutional conditions have
16   an essential role to play in setting rules differentiating profitable from nonprofitable activities in CE
17   (Moreau et al. 2017). Moreover, the prevalence CE practices such as reuse, refurbishment, and
18   recycling can differ substantially between developed and developing economies, leading to highly
19   context-specific mitigation potentials and policy approaches (McDowall et al. 2017).
20
21   One report estimates that the CE can contribute to more than 6 GtCO2 emission reductions in 2030,
22   including strategies such as material substitution in buildings (Blok et al. 2016). Reform of the tax
23   system towards GHG emissions and the extraction of raw materials substituting taxes on labour is key
24   precondition to achieve such a potential. Otherwise rebound effects tends to take back a high share of
25   marginal CE efforts. A 50% reduction of GHG emissions in industrial processes, including the
26   production of goods in steel, cement, plastic, paper, and aluminium from 2010 until 2050 are impossible
27   to attain only with reuse and radical product innovation strategies, but will need to also rely on the
28   reduction of primary input (Allwood et al. 2010).
29
30   CE strategies generally correspond to the “Avoid” strategy for primary materials (see Sections 5.1 and
31   5.3.2). CE strategies in industrial settings improve well-being mostly indirectly, via the reduction of
32   environmental harm and climate impact. They can also save monetary resources of consumers by
33   reducing the need for consumption. It may seem counterintuitive, but reducing consumers' need for
34   consumption of a particular product/service (e.g. reducing energy consumption) may increase a
35   consumption of another one (e.g. travels) associated with some type of energy use, or lead to greater
36   consumption if additional secondary markets are created. Hence, carbon emissions could rise if the
37   rebound effect is not considered (Chitnis et al. 2013; Zink and Geyer 2017).
38
39   Looking at “Shift” strategy (see Sections 5.1 and 5.3.2), the role of individuals as consumers/users has
40   received less attention than other aspects of the CE (e.g. technological interventions as “Improve”
41   strategy and waste minimisation as “Avoid” strategy) within mainstream debates to date. One
42   explanation is CE has roots in the field of Industrial Ecology, which has historically emphasized
43   materials systems more than the end-user. By shifting this perspective from the supply-side to the
44   demand-side in the CE, users are, for the most part, discussed as social entities that now must form new
45   relations with businesses to meet their needs. That is, the demand-side approach largely replaces the
46   concept of a consumer with that of a user, who must either accept or reject new business models for
47   service provision, stimulated by the pushes and pulls of prices and performance (Hobson 2019).
48   Relevant contributions to climate change mitigation at Gigaton scale by the CE will remain out of scope
49   if decision makers and industry fail to reduce primary inputs (high confidence). Systemic
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-66                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   (consequential) analysis is required to avoid the risk that scaling effects negate efficiency gains; such
 2   analysis is however rarely applied to date. For example, material substitution or refurbishment of
 3   buildings brings risk of increasing emissions despite improving or avoiding current materials (Eberhardt
 4   et al. 2019; Castro and Pasanen 2019) Besides, CE concepts that extend the lifetime of products and
 5   increase the fraction of recycling are useful but are both thermodynamically limited and will remain
 6   relatively small in scale as long as demand of primary materials continue to grow, and scale effects
 7   dominate. In spite of presenting a large body of literature on CE in general, only a small but growing
 8   body of literature exists on the net effects of its strategies from a quantitative perspective, with key
 9   knowledge gaps remaining on specific CE strategies. There is medium evidence that CE can reduce
10   overall emissions, energy use, and activity levels, with medium evidence that sharing economy can
11   reduce overall emissions, energy use, and activity levels, with medium agreement on the scale of
12   potential savings.
13
14
15   5.4 Transition toward high well-being and low-carbon demand societies
16   Demand-side mitigation involves individuals (e.g. consumption choices), culture (e.g. social norms,
17   values), corporate (e.g. investments), institutions (e.g. political agency), and infrastructure change (high
18   evidence, high agreement). These five drivers of human behaviour either contribute to the status-quo of
19   a global high-carbon, consumption, and GDP growth oriented economy or help generate the desired
20   change to a low-carbon energy-services, well-being, and equity oriented economy (Jackson 2017;
21   Cassiers et al. 2018; Yuana et al. 2020)(Figure 5.14). Each driver has novel implications for the design
22   and implementation of demand-side mitigation policies. They show important synergies, making energy
23   demand mitigation a dynamic problem where the packaging and/or sequencing of different policies play
24   a role in their effectiveness, demonstrated in Sections 5.5 and 5.6. The Social Science Primer
25   (Supplementary Material I Chapter 5) describes theory and empirical insights about the interplay
26   between individual agency, the social and physical context of demand-side decisions in the form of
27   social roles and norms, infrastructure and technological constraints and affordances, and other formal
28   and informal institutions. Incremental interventions on all five fronts change social practices, effecting
29   simultaneously energy and well-being (Schot and Kanger 2018). Transformative change will require
30   coordinated use of all five drivers, as described in Figure 5.14 and Table 5. using novel insights about
31   behaviour change for policy design and implementation (high evidence, high agreement). In particular,
32   socio-economic factors, such as equity, public service quality, electricity access and democracy are
33   found to be highly significant in enabling need satisfaction at low energy use, whereas economic growth
34   beyond moderate incomes and extractive economic activities are observed to be prohibiting factors
35   (Vogel et al. 2021).




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-67                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII




 1
 2   Figure 5.14 Role of people, demand-side action and consumption in reversing a planetary trajectory to a
 3      warming Earth towards effective climate change mitigation and dignified living standards for all

 4
 5   5.4.1 Behavioural Drivers
 6   Behaviour change by individuals and households requires both motivation to change and capacity for
 7   change (option availability/knowledge; material/cognitive resources to initiate and maintain change)
 8   (Moser and Ekstrom 2010; Michie et al. 2011) and is best seen as part of more encompassing collective
 9   action. Motivation for change for collective good comes from economic, legal, social incentives, regard
10   for deeper intrinsic value of concern for others over extrinsic values. Capacity for change varies; people
11   in informal settlements or rural areas are incapacitated by socio-political realities and have limited
12   access to new energy-service options.
13
14   Motivation and effort required for behaviour change increase from Improve to Shift to Avoid decisions.
15   'Improve' requires changes in personal purchase decisions, 'shift' involves changes in behavioural
16   routines, 'avoid' also involves shifts in deeper values or mindsets. People set easy goals for themselves
17   and more difficult ones for others (Attari et al. 2016) and underestimate the energy savings of behaviour
18   changes that make a large difference (Attari et al. 2010). Most personal actions taken so far have small
19   mitigation potential (recycling, ecodriving), and people refrain from options advocated more recently
20   with high impact (less flying, living car free) (Dubois et al. 2019).
21
22   As individuals pursue a broad set of goals and use calculation-, emotion-, and rule-based processes
23   when they make energy decisions, demand-side policies can use a broad range of behavioural tools that
24   complement subsidies, taxes, and regulations (Chakravarty and Roy 2016; Mattauch et al. 2016; Niamir
25   2019) (high evidence, high agreement). The provision of targeted information, social advertisements,
26   and influence of trusted in-group members and/role models or admired role models like celebrities can
27   be used to create better climate change knowledge and awareness (Niamir et al. 2020c,b; Niamir 2019).
28   Behavioural interventions like communicating changes in social norms can accelerate behaviour change
29   by creating tipping points (Nyborg et al. 2016). When changes in energy-demand decisions (such as
30   switching to a plant-based diet, Box 5.5) are motivated by the creation and activation of a social identity
31   consistent with this and other behaviours, positive spillover can accelerate behaviour change (Truelove
32   et al. 2014), both within a domain or across settings, e.g., from work to home (Maki and Rothman
33   2017).

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-68                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1
 2   START BOX 5.5 HERE
 3
 4                   Box 5.5 Dietary shifts in UK society towards lower emission foods

 5   Meat eating is declining in the UK, alongside a shift from carbon-intensive red meat towards poultry.
 6   This is due to the interaction of behavioural, socio-cultural and organisational drivers (Vinnari and
 7   Vinnari 2014). Reduced meat consumption is primarily driven by issues of personal health and animal
 8   welfare, instead of climate or environment concerns (Latvala et al. 2012; Dibb and Fitzpatrick 2014;
 9   Hartmann and Siegrist 2017; Graça et al. 2019). Social movements have promoted shifts to a vegan diet
10   (Morris et al. 2014; Laestadius et al. 2016) yet their impact on actual behaviour is the subject of debate
11   (Taufik et al. 2019; Harguess et al. 2020; Sahakian et al. 2020). Companies have expanded new markets
12   in non-meat products (MINTEL 2019). Both corporate food actors and new entrants offering more
13   innovative ‘meat alternatives’ view consumer preferences as an economic opportunity, and are
14   responding by increasing the availability of meat replacement products. No significant policy change
15   has taken place in the UK to enable dietary shift (Wellesley and Froggatt 2015); however the Committee
16   on Climate Change has recommended dietary shift in the Sixth Carbon Budget(Climate Change
17   Committee 2020), involving reduced consumption of high-carbon meat and dairy products by 20% by
18   2030, with further reductions in later years in order to reach net zero by 2050. Agricultural policies
19   serve to support meat production with large subsidies that lower production cost and effectively increase
20   the meat intensity of diets at a population level (Simon 2003; Godfray et al. 2018). Deeper, population
21   wide reductions in meat consumption are hampered by these lock-in mechanisms which continue to
22   stabilise the existing meat production-consumption system. The extent to which policymakers are
23   willing to actively stimulate reduced meat consumption thus remains an open question (Godfray et al.
24   2018). See more in Supplementary Material I Chapter 5, SM5.6.4.
25
26   END BOX 5.5 HERE
27   People’s general perceptions of climate risks, first covered in AR5, motivate behaviour change; more
28   proximate and personal feelings of being at risk triggered by extreme weather and climate-linked natural
29   disasters will increase concern and willingness to act (Bergquist et al. 2019), though the window of
30   increased support is short (Sisco et al. 2017). 67% of individuals in 26 countries see climate change as
31   a major threat to their country, an increase from 53% in 2013, though 29% also consider it a minor or
32   no threat (Fagan and Huang 2019). Concern that the COVID-19 crisis may derail this momentum due
33   to a finite pool of worry (Weber 2006) appears to be unwarranted: Americans’ positions on climate
34   change in 2020 matched high levels of concern measured in 2019 (Leiserowitz et al. 2020). Younger,
35   female, and more educated individuals perceive climate risks to be larger (Weber 2016; Fagan and
36   Huang 2019). Moral values and political ideology influence climate risk perception and beliefs about
37   the outcomes and effectiveness of climate action (Maibach et al. 2011). Motivation for demand-side
38   solutions can be increased by focusing on personal health or financial risks and benefits that clearly
39   matter to people (Petrovic et al. 2014). Consistent with climate change as a normally distant, non-
40   threatening, statistical issue (Gifford 2011; Fox-Glassman and Weber 2016), personal experience with
41   climate-linked flooding or other extreme weather events increases perceptions of risk and willingness
42   to act (Weber 2013; Atreya and Ferreira 2015; Sisco et al. 2017) when plausible mediators and
43   moderators are considered (Brügger et al. 2021), confirmed in all 24 countries studied by Broomell et
44   al (2015)(Broomell et al. 2015). Discounting the future matters (Hershfield et al. 2014): across multiple
45   countries, individuals more focused on future outcomes more likely engage in environmental actions
46   (Milfont et al. 2012).
47   There is medium evidence and high agreement that demographics, values, goals, personal and social
48   norms differentially determine ASI behaviours, in the Netherlands and Spain (Abrahamse and Steg
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-69                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   2009; Niamir 2019; Niamir et al. 2020b), the OECD (Ameli and Brandt 2015), and 11 European
 2   countries (Mills and Schleich 2012; Roy et al. 2012). Education and income increase Shift and Improve
 3   behaviour, whereas personal norms help to increase the more difficult Avoid behaviours (Mills and
 4   Schleich 2012). Sociodemographic variables (household size and income) predict energy use, but
 5   psychological variables (perceived behavioural control, perceived responsibility) predict changes in
 6   energy use; younger households are more likely to adopt Improve decisions, whereas education
 7   increases Avoid decisions (Ahmad et al. 2015). In India and developing countries, Avoid decisions are
 8   made by individuals championing a cause, while Improve and Shift behaviour are increases by
 9   awareness programmes and promotional materials highlighting environmental and financial benefits
10   (Roy et al. 2018a; Chakravarty and Roy 2016). Cleaner cookstove adoption (see Box 5.6), a widely
11   studied Improve solution in developing countries (Nepal et al. 2010; Pant et al. 2014), goes up with
12   income, education, and urban location. Female education and investments into reproductive health are
13   evident measures to reducing world population growth (Abel et al. 2016).
14
15   START BOX 5.6 HERE
16
17                        Box 5.6 Socio-behavioural aspects of deploying cookstoves

18   Universal access to clean and modern cooking energy could cut premature death from household air
19   pollution by two-thirds, while reducing forest degradation and deforestation and contribute to the
20   reduction of up to 50% of CO2 emissions from cooking (relative to baseline by 2030) (IEA 2017c; Hof
21   et al. 2019). However, in the absence of policy reform and substantial energy investments, 2.3 billion
22   people will have no access to clean cooking fuels such as biogas, LPG, natural gas or electricity in 2030
23   (IEA 2017c). Studies reveal that a combination of drivers influence adoption of new cookstove
24   appliances including affordability, behavioural and cultural aspects (lifestyles, social norms around
25   cooking and dietary practices), information provision, availability, aesthetic qualities of the technology,
26   perceived health benefits and infrastructure (spatial design of households and cooking areas). The
27   increasing efficiency improvements in electric cooking technologies, could enable households to shift
28   to electrical cooking at mass scale. The use of pressure cookers and rice cookers is now widespread in
29   South Asia and beginning to penetrate the African market as consumer attitudes are changing towards
30   household appliances with higher energy efficiencies (Batchelor et al. 2019). Shifts towards electric and
31   LPG stoves in Bhutan (Dendup and Arimura 2019), India (Pattanayak et al. 2019), Ecuador (Martínez
32   et al. 2017; Gould et al. 2018) and Ethiopia (Tesfamichael et al. 2021); and improved biomass stoves in
33   China (Smith et al. 1993). Significant subsidy, information (Dendup and Arimura 2019), social
34   marketing and availability of technology in the local markets are some of the key policy instruments
35   helping to adopt ICS (Pattanayak et al. 2019). There is no one-size-fits-all solution to household air
36   pollution – different levels of shift and improvement occur in different cultural contexts, indicating the
37   importance of socio-cultural and behavioural aspects in shifts in cooking practices. See more in
38   Supplementary Material Chapter 5, SM5.6.2.
39
40   END BOX 5.6 HERE
41   There is high agreement in the literature that the updating of educational systems from a
42   commercialised, individualised, entrepreneurial training model to an education cognizant of planetary
43   health and human well-being can accelerate climate change awareness and action (Mendoza and Roa
44   2014; Dombrowski et al. 2016) (also see Supplementary Material Chapter 5).
45
46   There is high evidence and high agreement that people’s core values affect climate-related decisions
47   and climate policy support by shaping beliefs and identities (Dietz 2014; Steg 2016; Hayward and Roy
48   2019). People with altruistic and biospheric values are more likely to act on climate change and support
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-70                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   climate policies than those with hedonic or egoistic values (Taylor et al. 2014), because these values
 2   are associated with higher awareness and concern about climate change, stronger belief that personal
 3   actions can help mitigating climate change, and stronger feelings of responsibility for taking climate
 4   action (Dietz 2014; Steg 2016). Research also suggest that egalitarian, individualistic, and hierarchical
 5   worldviews (Wildavsky and Dake 1990) have their role, and that successful solutions require policy
 6   makers of all three worldviews to come together and communicate with each other (Chuang et al. 2020).
 7
 8   Core values also influence which costs and benefits are considered (Hahnel et al. 2015; Gölz and Hahnel
 9   2016; Steg 2016). Information provision and appeals are thus more effective when tailored to those
10   values (Bolderdijk et al. 2013; Boomsma and Steg 2014), as implemented by the energy-cultures
11   framework (Stephenson et al. 2015; Klaniecki et al. 2020). Awareness, personal norms, and perceived
12   behavioural control predict willingness to change energy-related behaviour above and beyond
13   traditional sociodemographic and economic predictors (Schwartz 1977; Ajzen 1985; Stern 2000), as do
14   perceptions of self-efficacy (Bostrom et al. 2019). However, such motivation for change is often not
15   enough, as actors also need capacity for change and help to overcome individual, institutional and
16   market barriers (Young et al. 2010; Carrington et al. 2014; Bray et al. 2011).
17
18   Table 5.4 describes common obstacles to demand-side energy behaviour change, from loss aversion to
19   present bias (for more detail see Supplementary Material Chapter 5). Choice architecture refers to
20   interventions (“nudges”) that shape the choice context and how choices are presented, with seemingly-
21   irrelevant details (e.g., option order or labels) often more important than option price (Thaler and
22   Sunstein 2009). There is high evidence and high agreement that choice architecture nudges shape
23   energy decisions by capturing deciders’ attention; engaging their desire to contribute to the social good;
24   facilitating accurate assessment of risks, costs, and benefits; and making complex information more
25   accessible (Yoeli et al. 2017; Zangheri et al. 2019). Climate-friendly choice architecture includes the
26   setting of proper defaults, the salient positioning of green options (in stores and online), forms of
27   framing, and communication of social norms (Johnson et al. 2012). Simplifying access to greener
28   options (and hence lowering effort) can promote ASI changes (Mani et al. 2013). Setting effective
29   “green” defaults may be the most effective policy to mainstream low-carbon energy choices (Sunstein
30   and Reisch 2014), adopted in many contexts (Jachimowicz et al. 2019) and deemed acceptable in many
31   countries (Sunstein et al. 2019). Table 5.3a lists how often different choice-architecture tools were used
32   in many countries over the past 10 years to change ASI behaviours, and how often each tool was used
33   to enhance an economic incentive. These tools have been tested mostly in developed countries.
34   Reduction in energy use (typically electricity consumption) is the most widely studied behaviour
35   (because metering is easily observable). All but one tool was applied to increase this Avoid behaviour,
36   with demand-side reductions from 0% to up to 20%, with most values below 3% (see also meta-analyses
37   by (Hummel and Maedche 2019; Nisa et al. 2019; van der Linden and Goldberg 2020; Stankuniene et
38   al. 2020; Khanna et al. 2021). Behavioural, economic, and legal instruments are most effective when
39   applied as an internally consistent ensemble where they can reinforce each other, a concept referred to
40   as “policy packaging” in transport policy research (Givoni 2014). A meta-analysis, combining evidence
41   of psychological and economic studies, demonstrates that feedback, monetary incentives and social
42   comparison operates synergistically and is together more effective than the sum of individual
43   interventions (Khanna et al. 2021). The same meta-analysis also shows that combined with monetary
44   incentives, nudges and choice architecture can reduce global GHG emissions from household energy
45   use by 5-6% (Khanna et al. 2021).
46
47   Choice architecture has been depicted as an anti-democratic attempt at manipulating the behaviour of
48   actors without their awareness or approval (Gumbert 2019). Such critiques ignore the fact that there is
49   no neutral way to present energy-use related decisions, as every presentation format and choice
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-71                                 Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                Chapter 5                           IPCC AR6 WGIII


1   environment influences choice, whether intentionally chosen or not. Educating households and policy
2   makers about the effectiveness of choice architecture and adding these behavioural tools to existing
3   market- and regulation-based tools in a transparent and consultative way can provide desired outcomes
4   with increased effectiveness, while avoiding charges of manipulation or deception. People consent to
5   choice architecture tools if their use is welfare-enhancing, policymakers are transparent about their
6   goals and processes, public deliberation and participation is encouraged, and the choice architect is
7   trusted (Sunstein et al. 2019).
8




    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                5-72                               Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                                      Chapter 5                                IPCC AR6 WGIII


1                                                 Table 5.3a Inventory of behavioural interventions experimentally tested to change energy behaviours

     Behavioural                                                Energy Demand Behaviour
     Tool




                                 # in Developed
                   # of Papers




                                                   # in Other
                                 Countries


                                                   Countries




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Economic
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Incentive
                                                                                                                                                                                                   Improve
                                                                                                                                                                               Avoid

                                                                                                                                                                                       Shift
     Set the              27           26                1      Carbon Offset Program (3)                                                                                       11        12                 9               6
     Proper                                                     (Löfgren et al. 2012; Araña and León 2013)
     Defaults                                                   Energy Source (4)
                                                                (Kaiser et al. 2020); (Wolske et al. 2020)*
                                                                Energy Use (16)
                                                                (Jachimowicz et al. 2019; Nisa et al. 2019; Grilli and Curtis 2021)*
                                                                Investment in Energy Efficiency (7)
                                                                (Theotokis and Manganari 2015; Ohler et al. 2020)
                                                                Mode of Transportation (1)
                                                                (Goodman et al. 2013)
     Reach Out            10              9              1      Energy Use (4)                                                                                                     1           3             7               1
     During                                                     (Verplanken 2006; Jack and Smith 2016); (Iweka et al. 2019)*
     Transitions                                                Investment in Energy Efficiency (4)
                                                                (Gimpel et al. 2020)
                                                                Mode of Transportation (2)
                                                                (Verplanken et al. 2008)
     Provide        256             246               10        Energy Use (252)                                                                                               244             6             7           33
     Timely                                                     (Darby 2006; Buckley 2019)*
     Feedback &                                                 (Abrahamse et al. 2005; Fischer 2008; Steg 2008; Faruqui et al. 2010; Delmas et al. 2013; McKerracher and
     Reminders                                                  Torriti 2013; Karlin et al. 2015; Andor and Fels 2018; Bergquist et al. 2019; Iweka et al. 2019; Nisa et al.
                                                                2019; Zangheri et al. 2019; Ahir and Chakraborty 2021; Grilli and Curtis 2021; Khanna et al. 2021)*
                                                                Mode of Transportation (3)
                                                                (Steg 2008; Sanguinetti et al. 2020)*




    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                                       5-73                                   Total pages: 192
Final Government Distribution                Chapter 5                                 IPCC AR6 WGIII


 Make           247   235       12   Energy Source (3)                                                                                                197   38   24   33
 Information                         (Havas et al. 2015; Jagger et al. 2019)
 Intuitive &
 Easy to                             Energy Use (202)
 Access                              (Henryson et al. 2000; Darby 2006; Carlsson-Kanyama and Lindén 2007; Chen et al. 2017; Iwafune et al.
                                     2017; Burkhardt et al. 2019; Henry et al. 2019; Wong-Parodi et al. 2019; Mi et al. 2020; Stojanovski et al.
                                     2020)
                                     (Abrahamse et al. 2005; Ehrhardt-Martinez and Donnelly 2010; Delmas et al. 2013; Andor and Fels 2018;
                                     Bergquist et al. 2019; Buckley 2019; Iweka et al. 2019; Nisa et al. 2019; Zangheri et al. 2019; Wolske et al.
                                     2020; Ahir and Chakraborty 2021; Grilli and Curtis 2021; Khanna et al. 2021)*

                                     Investment in Energy Efficiency (30)
                                     (Larrick and Soll 2008); (Steg 2008; Andor and Fels 2018)*
                                     Mode of Transportation (19)
                                     (Steg 2008; Pettifor et al. 2017)*
 Make            58    53       5    Energy Use (24)                                                                                                   27   28   5    6
 Behaviour                           (Abrahamse et al. 2005; Delmas et al. 2013; Bergquist et al. 2019; Iweka et al. 2019; Nisa et al. 2019; Grilli
 Observable &                        and Curtis 2021)*
 Provide
 Recognition                         Investment in Energy Efficiency (30)
                                     (Pettifor et al. 2017)*
                                     Mode of Transportation (4)
                                     (Pettifor et al. 2017)*
 Communicate    138   131       7    Energy Source (1)                                                                                                106   21   16   15
 a Norm                              (Hafner et al. 2019)

                                     Energy Use (116)
                                     (Nolan et al. 2008; Ayers and Forsyth 2009; Allcott 2011; Costa and Kahn 2013; Allcott and Rogers 2014)
                                     (Abrahamse et al. 2005; Abrahamse and Steg 2013; Delmas et al. 2013; Andor and Fels 2018; Bergquist et
                                     al. 2019; Buckley 2019; Iweka et al. 2019; Nisa et al. 2019; Ahir and Chakraborty 2021; Khanna et al.
                                     2021)*

                                     Investment in Energy Efficiency (15)
                                     (Niamir et al. 2020b); (Pettifor et al. 2017; Grilli and Curtis 2021)*
                                     Mode of Transportation (7)
                                     (Bamberg et al. 2007); (Bergquist et al. 2019)*
 Reframe         74    68       6    Energy Source (5)                                                                                                 41   18   19   18
 Consequences
Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                5-74                                     Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                     Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII


      in Terms                                 (Wolske et al. 2018; Hafner et al. 2019); (Grilli and Curtis 2021)*
      People Care                              Energy Use (47)
      About                                    (Chen et al. 2017; Eguiguren-Cosmelli 2018; Ghesla et al. 2020; Mi et al. 2020)
                                               (Abrahamse et al. 2005; Darby 2006; Delmas et al. 2013; Bergquist et al. 2019; Khanna et al. 2021)*

                                               Investment in Energy Efficiency (22)
                                               (Forster et al. 2021); (Andor and Fels 2018)*
                                               Mode of Transportation (2)
                                               (Nepal et al. 2010; Mattauch et al. 2016)
      Obtain a            52      47       5   Energy Source (1)                                                                                               45       4        4    10
      Commitment                               (Jagger et al. 2019)

                                               Energy Use (47)
                                               (Ghesla et al. 2020)
                                               (Abrahamse et al. 2005; Steg 2008; Delmas et al. 2013; Andor and Fels 2018; Iweka et al. 2019; Nisa et al.
                                               2019; Grilli and Curtis 2021; Khanna et al. 2021)*

                                               Investment in Energy Efficiency (1)
                                               (Steg 2008)*
                                               Mode of Transportation (5)
                                               (Matthies et al. 2006); (Steg 2008)*
 1   Note: Papers in this review of behavioural interventions to reduce household energy demand were collected through a systemic literature search up to August 2021.
 2   Studies are included in the reported counts if they are (1) experimental, (2) peer-reviewed or highly cited reports, (3) the intervention is behavioural, and (4) the targeted
 3   behaviour is household energy demand. 559 papers are included in the review. Each paper was coded for: type of behavioural intervention, country of study, energy
 4   demand behaviour targeted, whether the target is an avoid, shift, or improve behaviour, and whether the intervention includes an economic incentive. Some papers do
 5   not report all elements. The energy demand behaviour column provides the count of papers that focus on each behaviour type (in parentheses after the behaviour). The
 6   citations that follow are not exhaustive but exemplify papers in the category, selected for impact, range, and recency. The asterisk (*) indicates references that are meta-
 7   analyses or systematic reviews. Papers within meta-analyses and systematic reviews that meet the inclusion criteria are counted individually in the total counts. The
 8   full reference list is available at https://osf.io/9463u/.
 9
10




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                     5-75                                   Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                                 IPCC AR6 WGIII


1                                               Table 5.3b Summary of effects of behavioural interventions in Table 5.3a.

     Behavioural   Results                                                                      Results Summary
     Tool          (expressed in household energy savings, unless otherwise stated)
     Set Proper    Meta-analyses find a medium to strong effect of defaults on
     Default       environmental behaviour. Jachimowicz et al. (2019) report a strong
                   average effect of defaults on environmental behaviour (Cohen’s d=.75,
                   confidence interval 0.39 - 1.12), though not as high as for consumer
                   decisions. They find that defaults, across domains, are more effective
                   when they reflect an endorsement (recommendation by a trusted source)
                   or endowment (reflecting the status quo). Nisa et al. (2019)* report a
                   medium average effect size (Cohen’s d = 0.35; range 0.04 - 0.55).
     Reach Out     The few interventions that focus on transitions and measure behaviour
     During        change (rather than energy savings) report mixed, moderate effect sizes.
     Transitions   People were unwilling to change their behaviour if they are satisfied with
                   current options (Mahapatra and Gustavsson 2008). Iweka et al. (2019)find
                   that effective messages can prompt habit disruption.
     Timely        The average effects of meta-analyses of feedback interventions on
     Feedback &    household energy use reductions range from 1.8% to 7.7%, with large
     Reminders     variations (Delmas et al. 2013; Buckley 2019; Nisa et al. 2019; Buckley
                   2020; Ahir and Chakraborty 2021; Khanna et al. 2021). The same is true
                   for two literature reviews (Abrahamse et al. 2005; Bergquist et al. 2019).
                   Most studies find a 4% - 10% average reduction during the intervention;
                   some studies find a non-significant result (Dünnhoff and Duscha 2008) or
                   a negative reduction (Winett et al. 1978).

                   Real-time feedback is most effective, followed by personalized feedback
                   (Buckley 2019, 2020). A review by Darby et al. (2006) finds direct
                   feedback (from the meter or display monitor) is more effective than
                   indirect feedback (via billing) (5 - 15% savings vs. 0 - 10% savings).
                   Feedback effects (Cohen’s d= .241) are increased when combined with a
                   monetary incentive (Cohen’s d=.96) and with a social comparison and a
                   monetary incentive (Cohen’s d=.714) (Khanna et al. 2021)

                   Sanguinetti et al. (2020) find that onboard feedback results in a 6.6%
                   improvement in the fuel economy of cars (Cohen’s d: .07, [.05,.08]).


    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-76                                   Total pages: 192
Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                                IPCC AR6 WGIII


               The effectiveness of feedback from in home displays (IHDs) is highly
               studied. Two reviews find them to have a 2 - 14% energy saving
               (Ehrhardt-Martinez and Donnelly 2010; Faruqui et al. 2010). A meta-
               analysis by McKerracher and Torriti (2013)finds a smaller range of
               results, with 3 - 5% energy savings.




 Make          Meta-analyses of information interventions on household energy use find
 Information   average energy savings between 1.8 - 7.4% and Cohen’s d effect sizes
 Intuitive &   between .05 and .30 (Delmas et al. 2013; Buckley 2019, 2020; Nemati and
 Easy to       Penn 2020; Ahir and Chakraborty 2021; Khanna et al. 2021); (Nisa et al.
 Access        2019)*. Study quality affects the measured effect—small sample sizes,
               shorter measurement windows, and self-selection are correlated with
               larger effects (Nisa et al. 2019; Nemati and Penn 2020). RCTs have a
               smaller effect size, 5.2% savings (95% CI [0.5%,9.5%]) (Nemati and Penn
               2020).
               Information combined with comparative feedback is more effective than
               information alone (d=.34 vs. .30, (Khanna et al. 2021); 8.5% vs. 7.4%,
               Delmas et al. 2013). Monetary incentives make information interventions
               more effective (Khanna et al. 2021).

               Energy efficiency labeling has a heterogenous effect on investment in
               energy efficiency(Abrahamse et al. 2005; Andor and Fels 2018).
               Efficiency labels on houses lead to higher price mark ups (Jensen et al.
               2016) and house prices (Brounen and Kok 2011). Energy star labels lead
               to significantly higher willingness to pay for refrigerators (Houde et al.
               2013), but energy and water conservation varies by appliance from 0 -
               23% (Kurz et al. 2005).

               A meta-analysis of interventions to increase alternative fuel vehicle
               adoption find a small effect (d=.20 - .28) (Pettifor et al. 2017).




Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-77                                      Total pages: 192
Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                                  IPCC AR6 WGIII


 Make           Making behaviour observable and recognition lead to 6-7% energy
 Behaviour      savings (Winett et al. 1978; Handgraaf et al. 2013; Nemati and Penn
 Observable &   2020) and a large effects size (Cohen’s d = [.79,1.06); Nisa et al. 2019*).
 Provide        Community-wide interventions result in 17-27% energy savings (Iweka et
 Recognition    al. 2019).

                Neighborhood social influence has a small (d=.28) effect on alternative
                fuel vehicle adoption (Pettifor et al. 2017).


 Communicate    The effect of social norm information on household energy savings ranges
 a Norm         from 1.7-11.5% (Delmas et al. 2013; Buckley 2020) and Cohen’s d
                from .08-.32,(Abrahamse and Steg 2013; Bergquist et al. 2019; Khanna et
                al. 2021); (Nisa et al. 2019)*, with similar effects on choice of mode of
                transportation. Pettifor et al. (2017) report a small effect (d=.20-.28) on
                selecting a more energy efficient car.

                The Opower study (Allcott 2011), prototypical for the impact of social
                norms on household energy consumption, finds 2% reduction in long-term
                energy use and 11-20% energy reduction in the short run (Allcott 2011;
                Ayres et al. 2013; Costa and Kahn 2013; Allcott and Rogers 2014).
                Impact decays over time (Allcott and Rogers 2012). Norm interventions
                are less effective for low energy users (Schultz et al. 2007; Andor et al.
                2017). Moral licensing and negative spillover can reduce the overall
                positive feedback of normative feedback (Tiefenbeck et al. 2013).

                Interventions are more effective when the norm is implicitly inducted, in
                individualistic countries, and when people care about the norm (Nolan et
                al. 2008; Bergquist et al. 2019; Khanna et al. 2021). Descriptive norm
                interventions (social comparisons) are more effective when communicated
                online/email or through in-home displays compared to billing letters
                (Andor and Fels 2018), when the reference group is more specific (Shen et
                al. 2015). Dolan and Metcalfe (2013) find conservation increased from 4%
                to 11% when energy savings tips are added.




Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-78                                     Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                     Chapter 5                                IPCC AR6 WGIII


      Reframe           A meta-analysis by Khanna et al. (Khanna et al. 2021) finds a small and
      Consequences      variable effect of motivational interventions that reframe consequences
      in Terms          (Cohens’s d = [0,.423]); Effect are larger when reframing is combined
      People Care       with monetary incentives and feedback (d = .96). Darby et al. (2006)
      About             report 10-20% savings for US pay-as-you-go systems. Providing lifecycle
                        cost information increases likelihood of purchasing eco-innovative
                        products (Kaenzig and Wüstenhagen 2010). Long term (10-year)
                        operating cost information leads to higher WTP for energy efficiency
                        compared to short term (1-year) cost information (Heinzle and
                        Wüstenhagen 2012). Monetary information increases the success of
                        energy reduction interventions (Newell and Siikamäki 2014; Andor and
                        Fels 2018). Reframing interventions are more effective when combined
                        with feedback (d = .24-.96) and with social comparisons and feedback (d
                        = .42) (Khanna et al. 2021)
      Obtain a          Commitment and goal interventions result in significant energy reduction
      Commitment        in half of studies(Abrahamse et al. 2005; Andor and Fels 2018); (Nisa et
                        al. 2019)*. Nisa et al. (2019) report a moderate average effect (Cohen's d
                        = 0.34, [.11, .66]). When results are significant, the energy savings are
                        around 10% (Andor and Fels 2018). Self-set goals perform better than
                        assigned goals (van Houwelingen and van Raaij 1989; McCalley and
                        Midden 2002; Andor and Fels 2018) and reasonable goals perform better
                        than unreasonably high or low goals (van Houwelingen and van Raaij
                        1989; Abrahamse et al. 2007; Harding and Hsiaw 2014). Interventions are
                        more effective when the commitment is public (Pallak and Cummings
                        1976) and when combined with information and rewards (Slavin et al.
                        1981; Völlink and Meertens 1999).
 1
 2   Note: The second column describes the effects of each of the eight behavioural tools. The third column plots the results of meta-analyses and reviews that focus on each tool.
 3   Effects are reported as described in the referenced paper, either as percentage of energy saved (dotted box) or by the effect size, measured as Cohen’s D (dashed box).
 4   *Two responses to Nisa et al. (2019) challenge their conclusion that behavioural interventions have a small impact on household energy use (Stern 2020; van der Linden &
 5   Goldberg, 2020). We report the raw data collected and used in Nisa et al. (2019). Our data summary supports the arguments by Stern (2020) and van der Linden (2020) that
 6   interventions should be evaluated in combination, as well as individually, and that the results are highly sensitive to the chosen estimator.
 7   a
       Range reported as 95% confidence interval of results used in the meta-analysis or review.
 8   b
       Range reported as all results included in the meta-analysis or review.
 9   c
       No range reported.
10   d
       Range indicates the reported results within a meta-analysis; this applies when multiple intervention types in a meta-analysis are classified as a single behavioural tool.
11

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                     5-79                                    Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   5.4.2 Socio-cultural drivers of climate mitigation
 2   Collective behaviours and social organisation is part of everyday life, and feeling part of active
 3   collective action renders mitigation measures efficient and pervasive (Climact 2018). Social and
 4   cultural processes play an important role in shaping what actions people take on climate mitigation,
 5   interacting with individual, structural, institutional and economic drivers (Barr and Prillwitz 2014). Just
 6   like infrastructures, social and cultural processes can ‘lock-in’ societies to carbon-intensive patterns of
 7   service delivery. They also offer potential levers to change normative ideas and social practices in order
 8   to achieve extensive emissions cuts (high confidence, see Table 5.4).
 9   In terms of cultural processes, we can distinguish two levels of analysis: specific meanings associated
10   with particular technologies or practices, and general narratives about climate change mitigation.
11   Specific meanings (e.g. comfort, status, identity and agency) are associated with many technologies
12   and everyday social practices that deliver energy services, from driving a car to using a cookstove (high
13   evidence, high agreement, see Section 5.5). Meanings are symbolic and influence the willingness of
14   individuals to use existing technologies or shift to new ones (Wilhite and Ling 1995; Wilhite 2009;
15   Sorrell 2015). Symbolic motives are more important predictors of technology adoption than
16   instrumental motives (Steg 2005; Noppers et al. 2014, 2015, 2016) (see mobility case study on app-
17   cabs in Kolkata, Box 5.8). If an invidiual’s pro-environmental behavior is associated with personal
18   meaning than it also increases subjective wellbeing (Zawadzki et al. 2020). Status consciousness is
19   highly relevant in high GHG emission intensive consumption choices (cars, houses). However,
20   inversely framing energy saving behaviour as high status is a promising strategy for emission reduction
21   (Ramakrishnan and Creutzig 2021).
22
23   At a broader level, narratives about climate mitigation circulate within and across societies, as
24   recognised in SR15, and are broader than the meanings associated with specific technologies (high
25   evidence, high agreement). Narratives enable people to imagine and make sense of the future through
26   processes of interpretation, understanding, communication and social interaction (Smith et al. 2017).
27   Stories about climate change are relevant for mitigation in numerous ways. They can be utopian or
28   dystopian (e.g. The great derangement by Amitav Ghosh) (Ghosh 2016), for example presenting
29   apocalyptic stories and imagery to capture people’s attention and evoke emotional and behavioural
30   response (O’Neill and Smith 2014). Reading climate stories has been shown to cause short-term
31   influences on attitudes towards climate change, increasing the belief that climate change is human
32   caused and increasing its issue priority (Schneider-Mayerson et al. 2020). Climate narratives can also
33   be used to justify scepticism of science, drawing together coalitions of diverse actors into social
34   movements that aim to prevent climate action (Lejano and Nero 2020). Narratives have been used by
35   indigenous communities to imagine climate futures divergent from top-down narratives (Streeby 2018).
36   Narratives are also used in integrated assessment and energy system models that construct climate
37   stabilisation scenarios, for example in the choice of parameters, their interpretation and model structure
38   (Ellenbeck and Lilliestam 2019). One important narrative choice of many models involves framing
39   climate change as market failure (which leads to the result that carbon pricing is required). While such
40   a choice can be justified, other model framings can be equally justified (Ellenbeck and Lilliestam 2019).
41   Power and agency shape which climate narratives are told and how prevalent they are (O’Neill and
42   Smith 2014; Schneider-Mayerson et al. 2020). For example, narratives have been used by indigenous
43   communities to imagine climate futures divergent from top-down, government-led narratives (Streeby
44   2018). The uptake of new climate narratives is influenced by political beliefs and trust. Policy makers
45   can enable emissions reduction by employing narratives that have broad societal appeal, encourage
46   behavioural change and complement regulatory and fiscal measures (Terzi 2020). Justice narratives
47   may not have universal appeal - in a UK study, justice narratives polarised individuals along ideological
48   lines, with lower support amongst individual with right-wing beliefs; by contrast, narratives centred on
49   saving energy, avoiding waste and patriotic values were more widely supported across society
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-80                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   (Whitmarsh and Corner 2017). More research is needed to assess if these findings are prevalent in
 2   diverse socio-cultural contexts, as well the role played by social media platforms to influence emerging
 3   narratives of climate change (Pearce et al. 2019).
 4
 5   Trust in organisations is a key predictor of the take-up of novel energy services (Lutzenhiser 1993),
 6   particularly when financial incentives are high (Stern et al. 1985; Joskow 1995). Research has shown
 7   that, if there is low public trust in utility companies, service delivery by community-based non-profit
 8   organisations in the US (Stern et al. 1985) or public/private partnerships in Mexico (Friedmann and
 9   Sheinbaum 1998), offer more effective solutions, yet only if public trust is higher in these types of
10   organisations. UK research shows that acceptance of shifts to less-resource intensive service provision
11   (e.g. more resource efficient products, extending product lifetimes, community schemes for sharing
12   products) varies depending on factors including trust in suppliers and manufacturers, affordability,
13   quality and hygiene of shared products, and fair allocation of responsibilities (Cherry et al. 2018). Trust
14   in other people plays an important role in the sharing economy (Li and Wang 2020), for example
15   predicting shifts in transport mode, specifically car-sharing involving rides with strangers (Acheampong
16   and Siiba 2019) (sharing economy see Section 5.3.4.2).
17
18   Action on climate mitigation is influenced by our perception of what other people commonly do, think
19   or expect, known as social norms (high evidence, high agreement) (Cialdini 2006) (see Table 5.3), even
20   though people often do not acknowledge this (Nolan et al. 2008; Noppers et al. 2014). Changing social
21   norms can encourage societal transformation and social tipping points to address climate
22   mitigation(Nyborg et al. 2016; Otto et al. 2020). Providing feedback to people about how their own
23   actions compare to others can encourage mitigation (Delmas et al. 2013), although the overall effect
24   size is not strong (Abrahamse and Steg 2013). Trending norms are behaviours that are becoming more
25   popular, even if currently practised by a minority. Communicating messages that the number of people
26   engaging in a mitigation behaviour (e.g. giving a financial donation to an environmental conservation
27   organisation) is increasing – a simple low cost policy intervention - can encourage shifts to the targeted
28   behaviour, even if the effect size is relatively small (Mortensen et al. 2019).
29
30   Socially comparative feedback seems to be more effective when people strongly identify with the
31   reference group (De Dominicis et al. 2019). Descriptive norms (perceptions of behaviours common in
32   others) are more strongly related to mitigation actions when injunctive norms (perceptions of whether
33   certain behaviours are commonly approved or disapproved) are also strong, when people are not
34   strongly personally involved with mitigation topics (Göckeritz et al. 2010), when people are currently
35   acting inconsistently with their preferences, when norm-based interventions are supported by other
36   interventions and when the context supports norm-congruent actions (Miller and Prentice 2016). A
37   descriptive norm prime (“most others try to reduce energy consumption”) together with injunctive norm
38   feedback (“you are very good in saving energy”) is a very effective combination to motivate further
39   energy savings (Bonan et al. 2020). Second-order beliefs (perceptions on what others in the community
40   believe) are particularly important for leveraging descriptive norms (Jachimowicz et al. 2018).
41
42   Behavioural contagion, which describes how ideas and behaviours often spread like infectious diseases,
43   is a major contributor to the climate crisis (Sunstein 2019). But harnessing contagion can also mitigate
44   warming. Carbon-heavy consumption patterns have become the norm only in part because we’re not
45   charged for environmental damage we cause (Pigou 1920). The deeper source of these patterns has been
46   peer influence (Frank 1999), because what we do influences others. A rooftop solar installation early in
47   the adoption cycle, for example, spawns a copycat installation in the same neighbourhood within four
48   months, on average. With such installations thus doubling every four months, a single new order results


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-81                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   in 32 additional installations in just two years. And contagion doesn’t stop there, since each family also
 2   influences friends and relatives in distant locations.
 3
 4   Harnessing contagion can also underwrite the investment necessary for climate stability. If taxed more
 5   heavily, top earners would spend less, shifting the frames of reference that shape spending of those just
 6   below, and so on—each step simultaneously reducing emissions and liberating resources for additional
 7   green investment (Frank 2020). Many resist, believing that higher taxes would make it harder to buy
 8   life’s special extras. But that belief is a cognitive illusion (Frank 2020). Acquiring special things, which
 9   are inherently in short supply, requires outbidding others who also want them. When top tax rates rise
10   in tandem, relative bidding power is completely unchanged, so the same penthouse apartments would
11   end up in the same hands as before. More generally, behavioural contagion is important to leverage all
12   relevant social tipping points for stabilising Earth’s climate (Otto et al. 2020).
13
14   For new climate policies and mitigation technologies to be rapidly and extensively implemented, they
15   must be socially acceptable to those who are directly impacted by those policies and technologies
16   (medium evidence, high agreement). Policies that run counter to social norms or cultural meanings are
17   less likely to be effective in reducing emissions (Demski et al. 2015; Perlaviciute et al. 2018; Roy et al.
18   2018b). More just and acceptable implementation of renewable energy technologies requires taking
19   account of the cultural meanings, emotional attachments and identities linked to particular landscapes
20   and places where those technologies are proposed (Devine-Wright 2009) and enabling fairness in how
21   decisions are taken and costs and benefits distributed (Wolsink 2007). This is important for achieving
22   the goal of SDG7 (i.e. increased use of renewable energy resources) in deveolping countries while
23   achieving energy justice (Calzadilla and Mauger 2017). ‘Top-down’ imposition of climate policies by
24   governments can translate into local opposition when perceived to be unjust and lacking transparency
25   (high evidence, high agreement). Policy makers can build trust and increase the legitimacy of new
26   policies by implementing early and extensive public and stakeholder participation, avoiding ‘NIMBY’
27   (Not In My Back Yard) assumptions about objectors and adopting ‘Just Transition’ principles (Owens
28   2000; Wolsink 2007; Wüstenhagen et al. 2007; Dietz and Stern 2008; Devine-Wright 2011; Heffron
29   and McCauley 2018). Participatory mechanisms that enable deliberation by a representative sample of
30   the public (Climate Assembly UK 2020) can inform policy making and increase the legitimacy of new
31   and difficult policy actions (Dryzek et al. 2019).
32
33   Collective action by civil society groups and social movements can work to enable or constrain climate
34   mitigation. Civil society groups can advocate policy change, provide policy research and open up
35   opportunities for new political reforms (high evidence, high agreement) as recognised in previous IPCC
36   reports (IPCC 2007). Grassroots environmental initiatives, including community energy groups, are
37   collective responses to, and critiques of, normative ways that everyday material needs (e.g. food,
38   energy, making) are produced, supplied and circulated (Schlosberg and Coles 2016). Such initiatives
39   can reconcile lower carbon footprints with higher life satisfaction and higher incomes(Vita et al. 2020).
40   Local initiatives such as Transition Towns and community energy can lead to improvements in energy
41   efficiency, ensure a decent standard of living and increase renewable energy uptake, while building on
42   existing social trust, and in turn, building social trust and initiating engagement, capacity building, and
43   social capital formation(Hicks and Ison 2018). Another example are grassroot initiatives that aim to
44   reduce food loss and waste, even as overall evidence on their effectiveness remains limited (Mariam et
45   al. 2020). However, community energy initiatives are not always inclusive and require policy support
46   for widespread implementation across all socio-economic groups (Aiken et al. 2017) In addition, more
47   evidence is required of the impacts of community energy initiatives (Creamer et al. 2018; Bardsley et
48   al. 2019).


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-82                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   Civil society social movements are a primary driver of social and institutional change (high evidence,
 2   high agreement) and can be differently positioned as, on the one hand, ‘insider’ social movements (e.g.
 3   World Wildlife Fund) that seek to influence existing state institutions through lobbying, advice and
 4   research and, on the other hand, ‘outsider’ social movements (e.g. Rising Tide, Extinction Rebellion)
 5   that advocate radical reform through protests and demonstrations(Newell 2005; Caniglia et al. 2015).
 6   Civil society social movements frame grievances that resonate with society, mobilise resources to
 7   coordinate and sustain mass collective action, and operate within – and seek to influence - external
 8   conditions that enable or constrain political change (Caniglia et al. 2015). When successful, social
 9   movements open up windows of opportunity (so called ‘Overton Windows’) to unlock structural change
10   (high evidence, high agreement) (Szałek 2013; Piggot 2018).
11
12   Climate social movements advocate new narratives or framings for climate mitigation (e.g. climate
13   ‘emergency’) (della Porta and Parks 2014); criticise positive meanings associated with high emission
14   technologies or practices (see Diet and Solar PV Case Studies, Box 5.5 and 5.7); show disapproval for
15   high emission behaviours (e.g. through ‘flight shaming’); model behaviour change (e.g. shifting to
16   veganism or public transport – see Case Study on Mobility in Kolkata, Box 5.8); demonstrate against
17   extraction and use of fossil-fuels(Cheon and Urpelainen 2018); and aim to increase a sense of agency
18   amongst certain social groups (e.g. young people or indigenous communities) that structural change is
19   possible. Climate strikes have become internationally prevalent, for example the September 2019 strikes
20   involved participants in more than 180 countries (Rosane 2019; Fisher and Nasrin 2020; Martiskainen
21   et al. 2020). Enabled by digitalisation, these have given voice to youth on climate (Lee et al. 2020) and
22   created a new cohort of active citizens engaged in climate demonstrations (Fisher 2019). Research on
23   bystanders shows that marches increase positive beliefs about marchers and collective efficacy (Swim
24   et al. 2019).
25
26   Countermovement coalitions work to oppose climate mitigation (high confidence). Examples include
27   efforts in the US to oppose mandatory limits on carbon emissions supported by organisations from the
28   coal and electrical utility sectors (Brulle 2019) and evidence that US opposition to climate action by
29   carbon-connected industries is broad-based, highly organized, and matched with extensive lobbying
30   (Cory et al., 2021). Social movements can also work to prevent policy changes, for example in France
31   the Gilet Jaunes objected to increases in fuel costs on the grounds that they unfairly distributed the costs
32   and benefits of price rises across social groups, for example between urban, peri-urban and rural areas
33   (Copland 2019).
34
35   Religion could play an important role in enabling collective action on climate mitigation by providing
36   cultural interpretations of change and institutional responses that provide resources and infrastructure
37   to sustain collective actions (Roy et al. 2012; Haluza-DeLay 2014; Caniglia et al. 2015; Hulme 2015).
38   Religion can be an important cultural resource towards sustainability at individual, community and
39   institutional levels(Ives and Kidwell 2019) , providing leverage points for inner transformation towards
40   sustainability (Woiwode et al. 2021). Normative interpretations of climate change for and from religious
41   communities are found in nearly every geography, and often observe popular movements for climate
42   action drawing on religious symbols or metaphors (Jenkins et al. 2018). This suggests the value for
43   policy makers of involving religious constituencies as significant civil society organisations in devising
44   and delivering climate response.
45
46   START BOX 5.7 HERE
47
48                              Box 5.7 Solar PV and the agency of consumers


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-83                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   As an innovative technology, solar PV was strongly taken up by consumers (Nemet 2019). Several key
 2   factors explain its success. First, modular design made it applicable to different scales of deployment
 3   in different geographical contexts (e.g. large-scale grid-connected projects and smaller-scale off-grid
 4   projects) and allowed its application by companies taking advantage of emerging markets (Shum and
 5   Watanabe 2009). Second, culturally, solar PV symbolised an environmentally progressive technology
 6   that was valued by users (Morris and Jungjohann 2016). Large-scale adoption led to policy change (i.e.
 7   the introduction of feed-in tariffs that guaranteed a financial return) that in turn enabled improvements
 8   to the technology by companies. Over time, this has driven large-scale reductions in cost and increase
 9   in deployment worldwide. The relative importance of drivers varied across contexts. In Japan, state
10   subsidies were lower yet did not hinder take-up because consumer behaviour was motivated by non-
11   cost symbolic aspects. In Germany, policy change arose from social movements that campaigned for
12   environmental conservation and opposed nuclear power, making solar PV policies politically
13   acceptable. In summary, the seven-decade evolution of solar PV shows an evolution in which the agency
14   of consumers has consistently played a key role in multiple countries, such that deriving 30-50% of
15   global electricity supply from solar is now a realistic possibility (Creutzig et al. 2017). See more in
16   Supplementary Material Chapter 5, SM5.6.1.
17
18   END BOX 5.7 HERE
19
20   5.4.3 Business and Corporate Drivers
21   Businesses and corporate organisations play a key role in the mitigation of global warming, through
22   their own commitments to zero-carbon footprints (Mendiluce 2021) decisions to invest in researching
23   and implementing new energy technologies and energy efficient measures, and the supply side
24   interaction with changing consumer preferences and behaviours, e.g. via marketing. Business models
25   and strategies work both as a barrier to and as accelerator of decarbonisation. Still existing lock-in in
26   infrastructures and business models advantages fossil fuel industry over renewable and energy efficient
27   end use industry (Klitkou et al. 2015). The fossil fuel energy generation and delivery system therefore
28   epitomises a barrier to the acceptance and implementation of new and cleaner renewable energy
29   technologies (Kariuki 2018). A good number of corporate agents have attempted to derail climate
30   change mitigation by targeted lobbying and doubt-inducing media strategies (Oreskes and Conway
31   2011). A number of corporations that are involved in the supply chain of both upstream and downstream
32   of fossil fuel companies, make up the majority of organizations opposed to climate action (Dunlap and
33   McCright 2015; Cory et al. 2021; Brulle 2019). Corporate advertisement and brand building strategies
34   also attempt to deflect corporate responsibility to individuals, and/or to appropriate climate care
35   sentiments in their own brand building; climate change mitigation is uniquely framed through choice
36   of products and consumption, avoiding the notion of the political collective action sphere (Doyle 2011;
37   Doyle et al. 2019).
38
39   Business and corporations are also agents of change towards decarbonisation, as demonstrated in the
40   case of PV and battery electric cars (Teece 2018). Beyond new low-carbon technologies, strong
41   sustainability business models (SSBM) are characterised by identifying nature as the primary
42   stakeholder, strong local anchorage, the creation of diversified income sources, and deliberate
43   limitations on economic growth (Brozovic 2019). However, SSBM are difficult to maintain if generally
44   traditional business models prevail, requiring short-term accounting.
45
46   Liability of fossil fuel business models and insurance against climate damages are key concerns of
47   corporations and business. Limitations and regulation on GHG emissions will compel the demand for
48   fossil fuel companies’ products (Porter and Kramer 2006). According to a European Systemic Risk
49   Board (ESRB 2016) report of the Advisory Scientific Committee, insurance industries are very likely
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-84                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   to incur losses due to liability risks. The divestment movement adds additional pressure on fossil fuel
 2   related investments (Braungardt et al. 2019), even though fossil fuel financing remains resilient (Curran
 3   2020). Companies, businesses and organisations might face liability claims for their contribution to
 4   changes especially in the carbon intensive energy sector. A late transition to a low-carbon economy
 5   would exacerbate the physical costs of climate change on governments, businesses and corporations
 6   (ESRB 2016).
 7
 8   Despite these seemingly positive roles that Businesses and corporate organisations tend to play towards
 9   sustainable transitions, there is a need to highlight the dynamic relationship between sustainable and
10   unsustainable trends (Antal et al. 2020). For example, the production of Sports Utility Vehicles (SUVs)
11   in the automobile market at the same time that car manufacturers are producing electric vehicles. An
12   analysis of the role of consumers as drivers of unsustainability for Businesses and Corporate
13   organisations is very important here as this trend will offset the sustainability progress being made by
14   these businesses and organisations (Antal et al. 2020).
15
16   Professional actors, such as building managers, landlords, energy efficiency advisers, technology
17   installers and car dealers, influence patterns of mobility and energy consumption (Shove 2003) by
18   acting as ‘middle actors’ (Janda and Parag 2013; Parag and Janda 2014) or ‘intermediaries’ in the
19   provision of building or mobility services (Grandclément et al. 2015; De Rubens et al. 2018). Middle
20   actors can bring about change in several different directions be it, upstream, or downstream or sideways.
21   They can redefine professional ethics around sustainability issues, and as influencers on the process of
22   diffusion of innovations (Rogers 2003), professionals can enable or obstruct improvements in efficient
23   service provision or shifts towards low-carbon technologies (LCTs) (e.g. air and ground source heat
24   pumps, solar hot water, underfloor heating, programmable thermostats, and mechanical ventilation with
25   heat recovery) and mobility (e.g. electric vehicles) technologies.
26
27   5.4.4 Institutional Drivers
28   The allocation of political power to incumbent actors and coalitions has contributed to lock-in of
29   particular institutions, stabilising the interests of incumbents through networks that include
30   policymakers, bureaucracies, advocacy groups and knowledge institutions (high agreement, high
31   evidence). There is high evidence and high agreement in that institutions are central in addressing
32   climate change mitigation. Indeed, social provisioning contexts including equity, democracy, public
33   services and high quality infrastructure are found to facilitate high levels of need satisfaction at lower
34   energy use, whereas economic growth beyond moderate incomes and dependence on extractive
35   industries inhibit it (Vogel et al. 2021). They shape and interact with technological systems (Unruh
36   2000; Foxon et al. 2004; Seto et al. 2014) and represent rules, norms and conventions that organise and
37   structure actions (Vatn 2015) and help create new path dependency or strengthen existing path
38   dependency (Mattioli et al. 2020) (also see case studies in Box 5.5-5.8 and Supplementary Material
39   Chapter 5). These drive behaviour of actors through formal (e.g., laws, regulations, and standards) or
40   informal (e.g., norms, habits, and customs) processes, and can create constraints on policy options
41   (Breukers and Wolsink 2007). For example, ‘the car dependent transport system’ is maintained by
42   interlocking elements and institutions, consisting of i) the automotive industry; ii) the provision of car
43   infrastructure; iii) the political economy of urban sprawl; iv) the provision of public transport; v)
44   cultures of car consumption (Mattioli et al. 2020). The behaviour of actors, their processes and
45   implications on policy options and decisions is discussed further in Section 5.6.
46
47   START BOX 5.8 HERE
48
49                  Box 5.8 Shifts from private to public transport in Indian megacities
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-85                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   In densely populated, fast-growing megacities, policy makers face the difficult challenge of preventing
 2   widespread adoption of petrol or diesel fuelled private cars as a mode of transport. The megacity of
 3   Kolkata in India provides a useful case study. As many as twelve different modes of public
 4   transportation, each with its own system structure, actors and meanings co-exist and offers means of
 5   mobility to its 14 million citizens. Most of the public transport modes are shared mobility options
 6   ranging from sharing between two people in a rickshaw or between a few hundred in metro or sub-
 7   urban trains. Sharing also happens informally as daily commuters avail shared taxis and neighbours
 8   borrow each other’s car or bicycle for urgent or day trips.
 9
10   A key role is played by the state government, in collaboration with other stakeholders, to improve the
11   system as whole and formalise certain semi-formal modes of transport. An important policy
12   consideration has been to make Kolkata’s mobility system more efficient (in terms of speed, reliability
13   and avoidance of congestion) and sustainable through strengthening coordination between different
14   mode-based regimes (Ghosh 2019) and comfortable with airconditioned space in a hot and humid
15   climate (Roy et al. 2018b). Policy makers have introduced multiple technological, behavioural and
16   socio-cultural measures to tackle this challenge. New buses have been purchased by public authorities
17   (Ghosh and Schot 2019). These have been promoted to middle-class workers in terms of modernity,
18   efficiency and comfort, and implemented using premium-fares. Digitalisation and the sharing economy
19   has encouraged take-up of shared taxi rides (‘app cabs’), being low cost and fast, but also influenced by
20   levels of social trust involved in rides with strangers (Acheampong and Siiba 2019; Ghosh and Schot
21   2019). Rickshaws have been improved through use of LNG and cycling has been banned from busy
22   roads. These measures contributed positively in bringing down the trend of greenhouse gas emissions
23   per unit of GDP to half in one decade within the Kolkata metropolitan area, with potential for further
24   reduction (Colenbrander et al. 2016). However, social movements have opposed some changes due to
25   concerns about social equity, since many of the new policies cater to middle class aspirations and
26   preferences, at the cost of low income and less privileged communities.
27
28   To conclude, urban mobility transitions in Kolkata shows interconnected policy, institutional and socio-
29   cultural drivers for socio-technical change. Change has unfolded in complex interactions between
30   multiple actors, sustainability values and megatrends, where direct causalities are hard to identify.
31   However, the prominence of policy actors as change-agents is clear as they are changing multiple
32   regimes from within. The state government initiated infrastructural change in public bus systems,
33   coordinated with private and non-governmental actors such as auto-rickshaw operators, app-cab owners
34   who hold crucial agency in offering public transport services in the city. The latter can directly be
35   attributed to the global momentum of mobility-as-a-service platforms, at the intersection of
36   digitalisation and sharing economy trends. More thoughtful action at a policy level is required to sustain
37   and coordinate the diversity of public transport modes through infrastructure design and reflecting on
38   the overall directionality of change (Schot and Steinmueller 2018; Roy et al. 2018b). See more in
39   Supplementary Material Chapter 5, SM5.6.3.
40
41   END BOX 5.8 HERE
42
43   5.4.5 Technological/Infrastructural Drivers
44   Technologies and infrastructures shape social practices and their design matters for effective mitigation
45   measures (high evidence, high agreement). There are systemic interconnections between infrastructures
46   and practices (Cass et al. 2018; Haberl et al. 2021), and their intersection explains their relevance
47   (Thacker et al. 2019). The design of a new electricity system to meet new emerging demand based on
48   intermittent renewable, can lead to a change in consumption habits and the adaption of lifestyles
49   compliant with more power supply interruption (Maïzi et al. 2017; Maïzi and Mazauric 2019). The

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-86                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                                IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   quality of the service delivery impacts directly the potential user uptake of low-carbon technologies. In
 2   the state of Himachal Pradesh of India, shift from LPG to electricity, with induction stove, has been
 3   successful due to the availability of stable and continuous electricity which has been difficult to achieve
 4   in any other Indian state (Banerjee et al. 2016). In contrast, in South Africa, where people who were
 5   using electricity earlier are now adopting LPG to diversify the energy source for cooking due to high
 6   electricity tariff and frequent blackouts (Kimemia and Annegarn 2016) (see Box 5.5 and Supplementary
 7   Material Chapter 5).
 8
 9   From a welfare point of view, infrastructure investments are not constrained by revealed or stated
10   preferences (high evidence, high agreement). Preferences change with social and physical environment,
11   and infrastructure interventions can be justified by objective measures, such as public health and climate
12   change mitigation, not only given preferences (high agreement, high evidence). Specifically, there is a
13   case for more investment in low-carbon transport infrastructure than assumed in environmental
14   economics as it induces low-carbon preferences (Creutzig et al. 2016a; Mattauch et al. 2018,
15   2016). Changes in infrastructure provision for active travel may contribute to uptake of more walking
16   and cycling (Frank et al. 2019). These effects contribute to higher uptake of low-carbon travel options,
17   albeit the magnitude of effects depends on design choices and context (Goodman et al. 2013, 2014;
18   Song et al. 2017; Javaid et al. 2020; Abraham et al. 2021). Infrastructure is thus not only required to
19   make low-carbon travel possible but can also be a pre-condition for the formation of low-carbon
20   mobility preferences (also see mobility case study in Box 5.7).
21
22   The dynamic interaction of habits and infrastructures also predict CO2-intensive choices. When people
23   move from a city with good public transport to a car-dependent city, they are more likely to own fewer
24   vehicles due to learned preferences for lower levels of car ownership (Weinberger and Goetzke 2010).
25   When individuals moving to a new city with extensive public transport were given targeted material
26   about public transport options, the modal share of public transport increased significantly (Bamberg et
27   al. 2003). Similarly, an exogenous change to route choice in public transport makes commuters change
28   their habitual routes (Larcom et al. 2017).
29
30   Table 5.4 Main features, insights, and policy implications of five drivers of decision and action. Entries in
31                 each column are independent lists, not intended to line up with each other.

      Driver            How does driver          What needs to            Driver’s policy      Examples
                        contribute to status     change?                  implications
                        quo bias?

      Behavioural       Habits and routines      New goals (sustainable   Policies need to     India’s new LPG
                        formed under different   lifestyle)               be context           scale up policy
                        circumstances do not                              specific and         uses insights about
                        get updated.             New capabilities         coordinate           multiple
                                                 (online real-time        economic, legal,     behavioural
                        Present-bias penalises   communication)           social, and          drivers of
                        upfront costs and                                 infrastructural      adoption and use.
                        discourages energy       New resources            tools and nudges     Rooftop solar
                        efficiency               (increased education)                         adoption
                        investments.                                      Relate climate       expanded in
                                                 Use of full range of     action to salient    Germany, when
                        Loss aversion            incentives and           local risks and      FITs removed risk
                        magnifies the costs of   mechanisms to change     issues.              from upfront-cost
                        change.                  demand-side behaviour                         recovery
                                                                                               Nuclear power
                                                                                               policies in

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-87                                   Total pages: 192
Final Government Distribution                       Chapter 5                                    IPCC AR6 WGIII


                   When climate change                                                            Germany post
                   is seen as distant, it is                                                      Fukushima
                   not feared.                                                                    affected by
                   Nuclear power and                                                              emotional factors
                   accident potential
                   score high on
                   psychological dread

 Socio-Cultural    Cultural norms (e.g.        Create positive             Embed policies         Communicate
                   status, comfort,            meanings and norms          in supportive          descriptive norms
                   convenience) support        around low-emission         social norms.          to electricity end
                   existing behaviour.         service delivery (e.g.                             users.
                                               mass transit).              Support
                   Lack of social trust                                    collective action      Community
                   reduces willingness to      Community initiatives       on climate             energy initiative
                   shift behaviour (e.g.       to build social trust and   mitigation to          RESCOOP.
                   adopt car-sharing).         engagement, capacity        create social trust
                                               building, and social        and inclusion.         Friday For Future.
                   Fear of social              capital formation.
                   disapproval decreases                                   Involve arts and
                   willingness to adopt        Climate movements           humanities to
                   new behaviours.             that call out the           create narratives
                                               insufficient, highly        for policy
                   Lack of opportunities       problematic state of        process
                   to participate in policy    delayed climate action.
                   create reactance
                   against ‘top down’          Public participation in
                   imposition.                 policy making and
                                               technology
                   Unclear or dystopian        implementation that
                   narratives of climate       increases trust, builds
                   response reduce             capacity and increases
                   willingness to change       social acceptance.
                   and to accept new
                   policies and                Positive narratives
                   technologies.               about possible futures
                                               that avoid emissions
                                               (e.g. emphasis upon
                                               health and slow/active
                                               travel).

 Business and      Lock-in mechanisms          New companies (like         Influence              Electrification of
 Corporate         that make incumbent         car sharing companies,      consumer               transport opens up
                   firms reluctant to          renewable energy start-     behaviour via          new markets for
                   change: core                ups) that pioneer new       product                more than a
                   capabilities, sunk          business models or          innovation             hundred million
                   investments in staff        energy service              Provide capital        new vehicles.
                   and factories, stranded     provisions.                 for clean energy
                   assets.                                                 innovation.

 Institutional     Lock-in mechanisms          New policy                  Feed-in Tariffs        Mobility case
                   related to power            instruments, policy         and other              study, India’s
                   struggles, lobbying,        discussions, policy         regulations that       LPG policy
                   political economy.          platforms,                  turn energy            sequence.
                                               implementation              consumers into
                                               agencies, including         prosumers.
                                               capacity.
 Infrastructural   various lock-in             many emerging               systemic               Urban walking
                   mechanisms such as          technologies, which are     governance to          and bike paths.

Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                       5-88                                       Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


                        sunk investments,       initially often more    avoid rebound
                        capabilities,           expensive, but may      effects.           Stable and
                        embedding in            benefit from learning                      continuous
                        routines/lifestyles.    curves and scale                           electricity supply
                                                economies that drive                       fostering
                                                costs down.                                induction stoves.

 1

 2   5.5 An integrative view on transitioning
 3   5.5.1 Demand-side transitions as multi-dimensional processes
 4   Several integrative frameworks including social practice theory (Røpke 2009; Shove and Walker 2014),
 5   the energy cultures framework (Stephenson et al. 2015; Jürisoo et al. 2019) and socio-technical
 6   transitions theory (McMeekin and Southerton 2012; Geels et al. 2017) conceptualise demand-side
 7   transitions as multi-dimensional and interacting processes (high evidence, high agreement). Social
 8   practice theory emphasises interactions between artefacts, competences, and cultural meanings (Røpke
 9   2009; Shove and Walker 2014)(Shove and Walker 2014; Røpke 2009). The energy cultures framework
10   highlights feedbacks between materials, norms, and behavioural practices (Stephenson et al. 2015;
11   Jürisoo et al. 2019). Socio-technical transitions theory addresses interactions between technologies, user
12   practices, cultural meanings, business, infrastructures, and public policies (McMeekin and Southerton
13   2012; Geels et al. 2017) and can thus accommodate the five drivers of change and stability discussed in
14   Section 5.4.
15
16   Section 5.4 shows with high evidence and high agreement that the relative influence of different drivers
17   varies between demand-side solutions. The deployment of ‘improve’ options like LEDs and clean
18   cookstoves mostly involves technological change, adoption by consumers who integrate new
19   technologies in their daily life practices (Smith et al. 1993; Sanderson and Simons 2014; Franceschini
20   and Alkemade 2016), and some policy change. Changes in meanings are less pertinent for those
21   ‘improve’-options that are primarily about technological substitution. Other improve-options, like clean
22   cookstoves, involve both technological substitution and changes in cultural meanings and traditions.
23   Deployment of ‘shift’ options like enhanced public transport involves substantial behavioural change
24   and transitions to new or expanded provisioning systems, which may include new technologies (buses,
25   trams), infrastructures (light rail, dedicated bus lanes), institutions (operational licenses, performance
26   contracts), financial arrangements, and new organisations (with particular responsibilities and
27   oversight) (high evidence, high agreement) (Deng and Nelson 2011; Turnheim and Geels 2019).
28   Changes in cultural meanings can facilitate ‘shift’ options. Shifts towards low-meat diets, for instance,
29   are motivated by costs and by beliefs about the undesirability of meat that relate more to issues like
30   health, nutrition and animal welfare than climate change (De Boer et al. 2014; Mylan 2018).
31
32   ‘Avoid’ options that reduce service levels (e.g. sufficiency or downshifting) imply very substantial
33   behavioural and cultural changes that may not resonate with mainstream consumers (Dubois et al.
34   2019). Other ‘avoid’ options like tele-working also require changes in cultural meanings and beliefs
35   (about the importance of supervision, coaching, social contacts, or office politics), as well as changes
36   in behaviour, institutions, business, and technology (including good internet connections and office
37   space at home). Because these interconnected changes were not widespread, tele-working remained
38   stuck in small niches and did not diffuse widely before the COVID-19 crisis (Hynes 2014, 2016;
39   Belzunegui-Eraso and Erro-Garcés 2020; Stiles 2020). As preferences change, new infrastructures and
40   social settings can also elicit new desirabilities associated with emerging low-energy demand service
41   provisioning systems (see 5.4.5).
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-89                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   Demand-side transitions involve interactions between radical social or technical innovations (such as
 2   the avoid, shift, improve options discussed in Section 5.3) and existing socio-technical systems, energy
 3   cultures, and social practices (high evidence, high agreement) (Stephenson et al. 2015; Geels et al.
 4   2017). Radical innovations such as tele-working, plant-based burgers, car sharing, vegetarianism, or
 5   electric vehicles initially emerge in small, peripheral niches (Kemp et al. 1998; Schot and Geels 2008),
 6   constituted by R&D projects, technological demonstration projects (Borghei and Magnusson 2016;
 7   Rosenbloom et al. 2018b), local community initiatives or grassroots projects by environmental activists
 8   (Hargreaves et al. 2013a; Hossain 2016). Such niches offer protection from mainstream selection
 9   pressures and nurture the development of radical innovations (Smith and Raven 2012). Many low-
10   carbon niche-innovations, such as those described in Section 5.3, face uphill struggles against existing
11   socio-technical systems, energy cultures, and social practices that are stabilised by multiple lock-in
12   mechanisms (high evidence, high agreement) (Klitkou et al. 2015; Seto et al. 2016; Clausen et al. 2017;
13   Ivanova et al. 2018). Demand-side transitions therefore do not happen easily and involve interacting
14   processes and struggles on the behavioural, socio-cultural, institutional, business and technological
15   dimensions (Nikas et al. 2020) (see also Section 5.4).
16
17   5.5.2 Phases in transitions
18   Transitions often take several decades, unfolding through several phases. Although there is variability
19   across innovations, sectors, and countries, the transitions literature distinguishes four phases,
20   characterised by generic core processes and challenges: 1) emergence, 2) early adaptation, 3) diffusion,
21   4) stabilisation (high confidence) (Rotmans et al. 2001; Markard et al. 2012; Geels et al. 2017) (Cross-
22   Chapter Box 12 in Chapter 16). These four phases do not imply that transitions are linear, teleological
23   processes, because set-backs or reversals may occur as a result of learning processes, conflicts, or
24   changing coalitions (very high confidence) (Geels and Raven 2006; Messner 2015; Davidescu et al.
25   2018). There is also no guarantee that technological, social, or business model innovations progress
26   beyond the first phase.
27
28   In the first phase, radical innovations emerge in peripheral niches, where researchers, inventors, social
29   movement organisations or community activists dedicate time and effort to their development (high
30   confidence) (Kemp et al. 1998; Schot and Geels 2008). Radical social, technical and business model
31   innovations are initially characterised by many uncertainties about technical performance, consumer
32   interest, institutions and cultural meanings. Learning processes are therefore essential and can be
33   stimulated through R&D, demonstration projects, local community initiatives or grassroots projects
34   (Borghei and Magnusson 2016; Hossain 2016; Rosenbloom et al. 2018b; van Mierlo and Beers 2020).
35   Typical challenges are fragmentation and high rates of project failure (den Hartog et al. 2018; Dana et
36   al. 2021), limited funding (Auerswald and Branscomb 2003), limited consumer interest, and socio-
37   cultural acceptance problems due to being perceived as strange or unfamiliar (Lounsbury and Glynn
38   2001) .
39
40   In the second phase, social or technical innovations are appropriated or purchased by early adopters,
41   which increases visibility and may provide a small but steady flow of financial resources (high evidence,
42   high agreement) (Zimmerman and Zeitz 2002; Dewald and Truffer 2011). Learning processes,
43   knowledge sharing and codification activities help stabilise the innovation, leading to best practice
44   guidelines, standards, and formalised knowledge (high evidence, high agreement) (Raven et al. 2008;
45   Borghei and Magnusson 2018). User innovation may lead to the articulation of new routines and social
46   practices, often in tandem with the integration of new technologies into people’s daily lives (Nielsen et
47   al. 2016; Schot et al. 2016). Radical innovations remain confined to niches in the second phase because
48   adoption is limited to small, dedicated groups (Schot et al. 2016), innovations are expensive or do not


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-90                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   appeal to wider groups, or because complementary infrastructure are missing (Markard and Hoffmann
 2   2016).
 3
 4   In the third phase, radical innovations diffuse into wider communities and mainstream markets. Typical
 5   drivers are performance improvements, cost reductions, widespread consumer interest, investments in
 6   infrastructure and complementary technologies, institutional support and strong cultural appeal (high
 7   evidence, high agreement) (Wilson 2012; Markard and Hoffmann 2016; Raven et al. 2017; Malone et
 8   al. 2017; Kanger et al. 2019). The latter may be related to wider cultural shifts such as increased public
 9   attention to climate change and new framings like ‘climate emergency’ which gained traction before
10   the Covid-19 pandemic (Bouman et al. 2020b). These concerns may not last, however, since public
11   attention typically follows cycles (Downs 1972; Djerf-Pierre 2012).
12
13   This phase often involves multiple struggles: economic competition between low-carbon innovations
14   and existing technologies and practices, business struggles between incumbents and new entrants
15   (Hockerts and Wüstenhagen 2010), cultural and framing struggles in public opinion arenas
16   (Kammermann and Dermont 2018; Rosenbloom 2018; Hess 2019a), and political struggles over
17   adjustments in policies and institutions, which shape markets and innovations (Meadowcroft 2011;
18   Roberts and Geels 2019). The lock-in mechanisms of existing practices and systems tend to weaken in
19   the third phase, either because competing innovations erode their economic viability, cultural legitimacy
20   or institutional support (Turnheim and Geels 2012; Roberts 2017; Kuokkanen et al. 2018; Leipprand
21   and Flachsland 2018) or because exogenous shocks and pressures disrupt the status quo (Kungl and
22   Geels 2018; Simpson 2019).
23
24   In the fourth phase, the diffusing innovations replace or substantially reconfigure existing practices and
25   systems, which may lead to the downfall or reorientation of incumbent firms (Bergek et al. 2013;
26   McMeekin et al. 2019). The new system becomes institutionalised and anchored in professional
27   standards, technical capabilities, infrastructures, educational programs, regulations and institutional
28   logics, user habits, and views of normality, which create new lock-ins (Galaskiewicz 1985; Shove and
29   Southerton 2000; Barnes et al. 2018)
30
31   Avoid, shift and improve options vary with regard to the four transition phases. Incremental ‘improve’
32   options, such as energy-efficient appliances or stand-alone insulation measures, are not transitions but
33   upgrades of existing technologies. They have progressed furthest since they build on existing
34   knowledge and do not require wider changes (Geels et al. 2018). Some radical ‘improve’ options, which
35   have a different technological knowledge base, are beginning to diffuse, moving from phase two to
36   three in multiple countries. Examples are electric vehicles, light-emitting diodes, or passive house
37   designs (Franceschini and Alkemade 2016; Berkeley et al. 2017). Many ‘shift’ and ‘avoid/reduce’
38   options like heat pumps, district heating, passive house designs, compact cities, less meat initiatives,
39   flight and car use reduction have low momentum in most countries, and are mostly in the first phase of
40   isolated initiatives and projects (Bergman 2013; Morris et al. 2014; Bows-Larkin 2015; Bush et al.
41   2016; Kivimaa and Martiskainen 2018; Hoolohan et al. 2018). Structural transitions in Dutch cities,
42   Copenhagen, and more recently Paris, however, demonstrate that transitions towards low-carbon
43   lifestyles, developed around cycling, are possible (Colville-Andersen 2018). Low-carbon demand-side
44   transitions are often still in early phases (high evidence, high agreement).
45
46   5.5.3 Feasible rate of change
47   Transitional change is usually slow in the first and second transition phase, because experimentation,
48   social and technological learning, and stabilisation processes take a long time, often decades, and
49   remain restricted to small niches (high confidence) (Wilson 2012; Bento 2013; Bento et al. 2018b).
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-91                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   Transitional change accelerates in the third phase, as radical innovations diffuse from initial niches into
 2   mainstream markets, propelled by the self-reinforcing mechanisms, discussed above. The rate of
 3   adoption (diffusion) of new practices, processes, artefacts, and behaviours is determined by a wide
 4   range of factors at the macro- and micro-scales, which have been identified by several decades of
 5   diffusion research in multiple disciplines (for comprehensive reviews see, e.g. (Mansfield 1968;
 6   Martino et al. 1978; Davis 1979; Mahajan et al. 1990; Ausubel 1991; Grubler 1991; Feder and Umali
 7   1993; Bayus 1994; Comin and Hobijn 2003; Rogers 2003; Van den Bulte and Stremersch 2004; Meade
 8   and Islam 2006; Peres et al. 2010)).
 9
10   Diffusion rates are determined by two broad categories of variables, those intrinsic to the
11   technology/product/practice under consideration (typically performance, costs, benefits), and those
12   intrinsic to the adoption environment (e.g., socio-economic and market characteristics).
13   Despite differences, the literature offers three robust conclusions on acceleration (high evidence, high
14   agreement): First, size matters. Acceleration of transitions is more difficult for social, economic, or
15   technological systems of larger size (in terms of number of users, financial investments, infrastructure,
16   powerful industries) (Wilson 2009, Wilson 2012). Size also matters at the level of the systems
17   component involved in a transition. Components with smaller unit-scale (“granular” and thus relatively
18   cheap), such as light bulbs or household appliances, turn over much faster (often within a decade) than
19   large-scale, capital-intensive lumpy technologies and infrastructures (such as transport systems) where
20   rates of change involve typically several decades, even up to a century (Grubler 1991; Leibowicz 2018).
21   Also, the creation of entirely new systems (diffusion) takes longer time than replacements of existing
22   technologies/practices (substitution) (Grübler et al. 1999); and late adopters tend to adopt faster than
23   early pioneers (Wilson 2012; Grubler 1996).
24
25   Arguments about scale in the energy system date back at least to the 1970s when Schumacher, Lovins
26   and others argued the case for smaller-scale, distributed technologies (Schumacher 1974; Lovins 1976,
27   1979). In 'Small is Profitable' Lovins and colleagues evidenced over 200 reasons why decentralised
28   energy resources, from distributed generation to end-use efficiency, made good business sense in
29   addition to their social, human-centred benefits (Lovins et al. 2003). More recent advances in digital,
30   solar and energy storage technologies have renewed technical and economic arguments in favour of
31   adopting decentralised approaches to decarbonisation (Cook et al. 2016; Jain et al. 2017; Lovins et al.
32   2018). Smaller-scale technologies from microprocessors to solar panels show dramatically faster cost
33   and performance improvement trajectories than large-scale energy supply facilities (Trancik 2014;
34   Sweerts et al. 2020, Creutzig et al, 2021, Fig. 5.15). Analysing the performance of over 80 energy
35   technologies historically, Wilson et al. (2020) found that smaller scale, more ‘granular’ technologies
36   are empirically associated with faster diffusion, lower investment risk, faster learning, more
37   opportunities to escape lock-in, more equitable access, more job creation, and higher social returns on
38   innovation investment. These advantages of more granular technologies are consistent with accelerated
39   low-carbon transformation (Wilson et al. 2020a).
40




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-92                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                    Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII




 1

 2        Figure 5.15 Demand technologies show high learning rates. Learning from small-scale granular
 3    technologies outperforms learning in larger supply side technologies. Line is linear fit of log unit size to
 4                                 learning rate for all 41 technologies plotted.
 5                           Source: Creutzig et al, 2021; based on Sweerts et al 2020.

 6
 7   Second, complexity matters, which is often related to unit-scale (Ma et al. 2008). Acceleration is more
 8   difficult for options with higher degrees of complexity (e.g., carbon capture, transport and storage, or a
 9   hydrogen economy) representing higher technological and investment risks that can slow down change.
10   Options with lower complexity are easier to accelerate because they involve less experimentation and
11   debugging and require less adoption efforts and risk.
12   Third, agency, structure and meaning can accelerate transitions. The creation and mobilisation of actor
13   coalitions is widely seen as important for acceleration, especially if these involve actors with technical
14   skills, financial resources and political capital (Kern and Rogge 2016; Hess 2019b; Roberts and Geels
15   2019). Changes in policies and institutions can also accelerate transitions, especially if these create
16   stable and attractive financial incentives or introduce technology-forcing standards or regulations
17   (Brand et al. 2013; Kester et al. 2018; Roberts et al. 2018). Changes in meanings and cultural norms
18   can also accelerate transitions, especially when they affect consumer practices, enhance social
19   acceptance, and create legitimacy for stronger policy support (Lounsbury and Glynn 2001; Rogers
20   2003; Buschmann and Oels 2019). Adoption of most advanced practices can support leapfrogging
21   polluting technologies (Box 5.9).
22
23   START BOX 5.9 HERE
24
25                                       Box 5.9 Is leapfrogging possible?

26   The concept of leapfrogging emerged in development economics (Soete 1985), energy policy
27   (Goldemberg 1991) and environmental regulation (Perkins 2003), which provides a first critical review
28   of the concept), and refers to a development strategy that skips traditional and polluting development

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-93                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   in favour of the most advanced concepts. For instance, in rural areas without telephone landlines or
 2   electricity access (cables), a direct shift to mobile telephony or distributed, locally-sourced energy
 3   systems is promoted, or economic development policies for pre-industrial economies forego the
 4   traditional initial emphasis of heavy industry industrialisation, instead of focusing on services like
 5   finance or tourism. Often leapfrogging is enabled by learning and innovation externalities where
 6   improved knowledge and technologies become available for late adopters at low costs. The literature
 7   highlights many cases of successful leapfrogging but also highlights limitations (for a review see
 8   Watson and Sauter (Watson and Sauter 2011); with example case studies for China e.g. Gallagher
 9   (Gallagher 2006) or Chen and Li-Hua (Chen and Li-Hua 2011); Mexico (Gallagher and Zarsky 2007);
10   or Japan and Korea, e.g. Cho et al. (Cho et al. 1998). Increasingly the concept is being integrated into
11   the literature of low-carbon development, including innovation and technology transfer policies (for a
12   review see Pigato (Pigato et al. 2020)), highlighting in particular the importance of contextual factors
13   of successful technology transfer and leapfrogging including: domestic absorptive capacity and
14   technological capabilities (Cirera and Maloney 2017); human capital, skills, and relevant technical
15   know-how (Nelson and Phelps 1966); the size of the market (Keller 2004); greater openness to trade
16   (Sachs and Warner 1995; Keller 2004); geographical proximity to investors and financing (Comin et
17   al. 2012); environmental regulatory proximity (Dechezleprêtre et al. 2015); and stronger protection
18   of intellectual property rights (Dechezleprêtre et al. 2013; Dussaux et al. 2017). The existence of a
19   technological potential for leapfrogging therefore needs to be considered within a wider context of
20   social, institutional, and economic factors that influence if leapfrogging potentials can be realised (high
21   evidence, high agreement).

22   END BOX 5.9 HERE

23   There are also some contentious topics in the debate on accelerated low-carbon transitions. First, while
24   acceleration is desirable to mitigate climate change, there is a risk that accelerating change too much
25   may short-cut crucial experimentation and social and technological learning in “formative phases”
26   (Bento 2013; Bento et al. 2018b) and potentially lead to a pre-mature lock-in of solutions that later turn
27   out to have negative impacts (Cowan 1990, 1991) (high evidence, medium agreement).
28
29   Second, there is an ongoing debate about the most powerful leverage points and policies for speeding
30   up change in social and technological systems. Farmer et al. 2019 suggested “sensitive intervention
31   points” for low-carbon transitions, but do not quantify the impacts on transformations. Grubler et al.
32   2018 proposed an end-user and efficiency-focused strategy to achieve rapid emission reductions and
33   quantified their scenario with a leading IAM. However, discussion of the policy implications of such a
34   strategy have only just started (Wilson et al. 2019a) suggesting an important area for future research.
35   The last contentious issue is if policies can/should substitute for lack of economic/social appeal of
36   change or for technological risks. Many large-scale supply-side climate mitigation options such as CCS
37   or nuclear power involve high technological risks, critically depend on a stable carbon price, and are
38   controversial in terms of social and environmental impacts (cf. the reviews in (Sovacool et al. 2014;
39   Wilson et al. 2020a) and the comprehensive discussion in (Smith et al. 2016) (high evidence, medium
40   agreement). There is continuing debate if and how policies could counterbalance these impacts in order
41   to accelerate transitions (Nordhaus 2019; Lovins 2015). Some demand-side options like large-scale
42   public transport infrastructures such as “Hyperloop” (Decker et al. 2017) or concepts such as “Asian
43   Super Grid” (maglev fast train coupled with superconducting electricity transmission networks) (AIGC
44   2017) may face similar challenges, which adds weight and robustness to those demand-side options that
45   are more decentralised, granular in scale and provide potential tangible consumer benefits besides being
46   low-carbon (like more efficient buildings and appliances, “soft” urban mobility options (walking and
47   cycling), digitalisation, among others, cf. Grubler et al. 2018).
48
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-94                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   A robust conclusion from this review is that there are no generic acceleration policies that are
 2   independent from the nature of what changes, by whom and how. Greater contextualisation and
 3   granularity in policy approaches is therefore important to address the challenges of rapid transitions
 4   towards zero-carbon systems (high evidence, high agreement).
 5
 6
 7   5.6 Governance and policy
 8   5.6.1 Governing mitigation: participation and social trust
 9   In demand side mitigation, governance is key to drive the multidimensional changes needed to meet
10   service needs within a society that provide people with a decent living while increasingly reducing
11   resource and energy input levels (Rojas-Rueda et al. 2012; Batchelor et al. 2018; OECD 2019a).
12   Impartial governance, understood as equal treatment of everyone by the rule of law, creates social trust
13   and is thus a key enabler of inclusive and participatory demand-side climate policies (Rothstein 2011).
14   Inclusive and broad-based participation itself also leads to greater social trust and thus is also a key
15   enabler of demand-side climate mitigation (see Section 5.2 for details). Higher social trust and inclusive
16   participatory processes also reduce inequality, restrain opportunistic behaviour and enhance
17   cooperation (Drews and van den Bergh 2016; Gür 2020) (see also Section 5.2). Altogether, broad-based
18   participatory processes are central to the successful implementation of climate policies (Rothstein and
19   Teorell 2008; Klenert et al. 2018) (high evidence , medium agreement). A culture of cooperation feeds
20   back to increase social trust and enables action that reduce GHG emissions (Carattini et al. 2015; Jo and
21   Carattini 2021), and requires including explicit consideration of the informal sector (Box 5.10). More
22   equitable societies also have the institutional flexibility to allow for mitigation to advance faster, given
23   their readiness to adopt locally appropriate mitigation policies; they also suffer less from policy lock-in
24   (Tanner et al. 2009; Lorenz 2013; Chu 2015; Cloutier et al. 2015; Martin 2016; Vandeweerdt et al.
25   2016; Turnheim et al. 2018; Seto et al. 2016).
26
27   START BOX 5.10 HERE
28
29                           Box 5.10 The informal sector and climate mitigation
30   The informal economy represents a large and growing portion of socio-economic activities (Charmes
31   2016; Muchie et al. 2016; Mbaye and Gueye 2018), including much of the work done by women
32   worldwide. It accounts for an estimated 61% of global employment in the world; 90% in developing
33   countries, 67% in emerging countries, and 18% in developed countries (Berik 2018), representing
34   roughly 30% of GDP across a range of countries (Durán Heras 2012; Narayan 2017). Due to its
35   importance, policies which support informal-sector climate mitigation activities may be extremely
36   efficient (Garland and Allison M. 2015). For example, environmental and energy taxes may have
37   negative gross costs when the informal sector dominates economic activity since these taxes indirectly
38   tax the informal sector; informal production may substitute for energy-intensive goods, with strong
39   welfare-enhancing effects (Bento et al. 2018a). The informal sector can assemble social and financial
40   capital, create jobs, and build low-carbon local economies (Ruzek 2015). Constraints on small and
41   informal-sector firms’ ability to build climate resilience include financial and data barriers, limited
42   access to information technology, and policy exclusion (Kraemer-Mbula and Wunsch-Vincent 2016;
43   Crick et al. 2018a,b).
44
45   Informal-sector innovation is often underrated. It gives marginalised people access to welfare-
46   enhancing innovations, building on alternative knowledge and socially-embedded reciprocal exchange
47   (Jaffe and Koster 2019; Sheikh 2019; Sheikh and Bhaduri 2020). Large improvements in low-emission,
48   locally-appropriate service provision are possible by facilitating informal-sector service providers’
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                   5-95                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                 Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   access to low-energy technologies (while taking care not to additionally burden the unpaid and
 2   marginalised), through such means as education, participatory governance, government policies to
 3   assist the informal sector, social services, healthcare, credit provision, and removing harmful policies
 4   and regulatory silos. The importance of the informal economy, especially in low-income countries,
 5   opens many possibilities for new approaches to DLS service provision along with climate resilience
 6   (Rynikiewicz and Chetaille 2006; Backstränd et al. 2010; Porio 2011; Kriegler et al. 2014; Taylor and
 7   Peter 2014; Brown and McGranahan 2016; Chu 2016; Boran 2019; Hugo and du Plessis 2019;
 8   Satterthwaite et al. 2018; Schröder et al. 2019; Javaid et al. 2020).
 9
10   Public information and understanding of the CO2-eq emissions implied by consumption patterns can
11   unleash great creativity for meeting service needs fairly and with lower emissions (Darier and Schüle
12   1999; Sterman and Sweeney 2002; Lorenzoni et al. 2007; Billett 2010; Marres 2011; Zapico Lamela et
13   al. 2011; Polonsky et al. 2012; Williams et al. 2019). Community-based mapping, social learning, green
14   infrastructure development, and participatory governance facilitate such information-sharing (Tauhid
15   and Zawani 2018; Mazeka et al. 2019; Sharifi 2020), strengthening mitigation policies (Loiter et al.
16   1999; Stokes and Warshaw 2017; Zhou et al. 2019).
17
18   Since informal settlements are usually dense, upgrading them supports low-carbon development
19   pathways which leapfrog less-efficient housing, transport and other service provision, using locally-
20   appropriate innovations (Satterthwaite et al. 2018). Examples of informal-sector mitigation include
21   digital banking in Africa; mobility in India using recycled motors and collective transport; food
22   production, meal provision, and reduction of food waste in Latin America (e.g. soup kitchens in Brazil,
23   community kitchens in Lima, Peru); informal materials recycling, space heating and cooling, and
24   illumination (Hordijk 2000; Baldez 2003; Maumbe 2006; Gutberlet 2008; Chaturvedi and Gidwani
25   2011; Nandy et al. 2015; Rouse and Verhoef 2016; Ackah 2017).
26
27   END BOX 5.10 HERE
28
29   5.6.2 Policies to strengthen Avoid-Shift-Improve
30   There is high untapped potential of demand-side mitigation options if considered holistically within the
31   domains of avoid-shift-improve (Sections 5.3 and 5.4; Tables 5.1, 5.2, 5.3a, and 5.3b). Within the
32   demand-side mitigation options opportunity space, policies currently focus more on efficiency and
33   ‘improve’ options and relatively less on ‘shift’ and ‘avoid’ options (Dubois et al. 2019; Moberg et al.
34   2019). Current demand side policies are fragmented, piecemeal and too weak to drive demand-side
35   transitions commensurate with 1.5oC or 2oC climate goals (Wilson et al. 2012; Fawcett et al. 2019;
36   Mundaca et al. 2019; Moberg et al. 2019) (high evidence, high agreement). However, increasingly
37   policy mix in a number of countries has seen a rise in prohibitions on fossil fuel use as a way to weaken
38   lock-ins, for example, in fossil fuel heating in favour of low carbon alternatives (Rosenbloom et al.
39   2020). Policies that are aimed at behaviour and lifestyle changes carry a perception of political risks
40   for policy makers, which may explain why policy instruments focus more on information provision and
41   adoption of incentives than on regulation and investment (Rosenow et al. 2017; Moberg et al. 2019).
42   Acceleration of demand-side transitions would thus require both a broadening of demand-side options
43   and the creation of comprehensive and targeted policy mixes (Kern et al. 2017; Rosenow et al. 2017;
44   IPCC 2018) that strengthens five drivers of decision and action identified in Section 5.4, Table 5. and
45   in the tables below (high evidence, high agreement). Demand-side transitions in developing and
46   emerging economies would also require stronger administrative capacity as well as technical and
47   financial support (UN-Habitat 2013; Creutzig et al. 2016b).
48
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-96                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                                IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   Systematic categorisation of demand-side policy options in different sectors and services through the
 2   avoid-shift-improve (ASI) framework enables identification of major entry points and possible
 3   associated social struggles to overcome for the policy instruments/interventions as discussed below.
 4
 5   5.6.2.1    Avoid policies
 6   There is high evidence and agreement that “Avoid’ policies that affect lifestyle changes offer
 7   opportunities for cost-effective reductions in energy use and emissions, but would need to overcome
 8   political sensitivities around government efforts to shape and modify individual-level behaviour (see
 9   Table 5.5) (Grubb et al. 2020; Rosenow et al. 2017). These policies include ways to help avoid travel
10   growth through integrated city planning or building retrofits to help avoid demand for transport, heating
11   or cooling (Bakker et al. 2014; Lucon et al. 2014; de Feijter et al. 2019), which interact with existing
12   infrastructure. Dense pedestrianised cities and towns and medium-density transit corridors are better
13   placed to implement policies for car reductions than ‘sprawled’ cities characterised by low-density,
14   auto-dependent and separated land uses (Seto et al. 2014; Newman and Kenworthy 2015; Newman et
15   al. 2017; Bakker et al. 2014).
16
17   Cities face pressing priorities like poverty reduction, meeting basic services and building human and
18   institutional capacity. These are met with highly accessible walkable and cyclable cities, connected with
19   public transit corridors, enabling equal accessibility for all citizens, and enabling a high level of service
20   provisioning (UN-Habitat 2013; Creutzig et al. 2016b). Infrastructure development costs less than for
21   car dependent cities. However, it requires a mindset shift for urban and transport planners (medium
22   evidence, high agreement).
23
24   Policies that support the avoidance of higher emission lifestyles and improve wellbeing are facilitated
25   by the introduction of smart technologies, infrastructures and practices (Amini et al. 2019). They
26   include regulations and measures for investment in high-quality ICT infrastructure, regulations to
27   restrict number plates as well as company policy around flexible working conditions (Lachapelle et al.
28   2018; Shabanpour et al. 2018). Working-from-home arrangements may advantage certain segments of
29   society such as male, older, higher educated and highly paid employees, potentially exacerbating
30   existing inequalities in the labour market (Lambert et al. 2020; Bonacini et al. 2021). In the absence of
31   distributive or other equity-based measures, the potential gains in terms of emissions reduction may
32   therefore be counteracted by the cost of increasing inequality. This potential growth in inequality is
33   likely to be more severe in poorer countries that will additionally suffer from a lack of international
34   funding for achieving the SDGs (Barbier and Burgess 2020; UN 2020) (high evidence, medium
35   agreement).
36
37                            Table 5.5 Examples of policies to enable “avoid” options

        Mitigation       Perceived struggles to overcome                  Policy to overcome struggles
         Option                                                                     (Incentives)
         Reduce       Overcoming existing paradigms and         Integrated city planning to avoid travel growth,
        passenger     planning practices and car dependency     car reduction, building retrofits to avoid heating
           km         (Rosenow et al. 2017; Grubb et al.        or cooling demand (Bakker et al. 2014; Lucon et
                      2020).                                    al. 2014; de Feijter et al. 2019).

                      Financial and capacity barrier in many    Public-private partnership to overcome financial
                      developing countries.                     barrier. (see Box 5.7) (Roy et al. 2018b).

                      Status dimension of private cars          Taxation of status consumption; reframing of
                                                                low-carbon transport as high status (Hoor 2020;
                                                                Ramakrishnan and Creutzig 2021).

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-97                                  Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                     Chapter 5                                 IPCC AR6 WGIII


      Reduce/avoid     Little visible political and social         Strengthen national nutrition guidelines for
       food waste      momentum to prevent food waste in the       health safety, Improve education/awareness on
                       Global North.                               food waste; policies to eliminate ambiguous food
                                                                   labelling include well-defined and clear date
                                                                   labelling systems for food (Wilson et al. 2017);
                                                                   policies to support R&D to improve packaging to
                                                                   extend shelf life (Thyberg and Tonjes 2016).
                                                                   Charging according to how much food
                                                                   households throw away.

       Reduce size     Size of residents/dwelling getting          Compact city design, taxing residential properties
       of dwellings    smaller in many countries.                  with high per capita area, progressive taxation of
                                                                   high status consumption (Ramakrishnan and
                                                                   Creutzig 2021).

      Reduce/avoid     Change in individual behaviour in dress     Temperature set point as norm; building energy
          heating,     codes and working times                     codes that set building standards; bioclimatic
       cooling and                                                 or/and zero emissions; cities and buildings that
        lighting in                                                incorporate features like daylighting and
         dwellings                                                 increased building depth, height, and
                                                                   compactness (Steemers 2003; Creutzig et al.
                                                                   2016a).

        Sharing        Inclusivity and involvement of users in     Lower prices for public parking, and subsidies
      economy for      design. Digital divide, unequal access      towards the purchase of electric vehicles
      more service     and unequal digital literacy (Pouri and     providers of electric vehicle (EV) sharing
      per product      Hilty 2018). Political or power             services were given subsidies towards the
                       relations among actors involved in the      purchase of electric vehicles (Jung and Koo
                       sharing economy (Curtis and Lehner          2018).
                       2019).
 1
 2   5.6.2.2   Shift policies
 3   As indicated in Table 5.6, ‘Shift’ policies have various forms such as the demand for low carbon
 4   materials for buildings and infrastructure in manufacturing and services and shift from meat-based
 5   protein, mainly beef, to plant-based diets of other protein sources (Willett et al. 2019; Ritchie et al.
 6   2018; Springmann et al. 2016a) (high evidence, high agreement). Governments also play a direct role
 7   beyond nudging citizens with information about health and wellbeing. While the effectiveness of these
 8   policies on behaviour change overall may be limited (Pearson-Stuttard et al. 2017; Shangguan et al.
 9   2019), there is some room for policy to influence actors upstream, i.e. industry and supermarkets which
10   may give rise to longer-term, structural change.
11
12                              Table 5.6 Examples of policies to enable “shift” options

        Mitigation         Perceived struggles to overcome                    Policy to overcome struggles
          Option                                                                       (Incentives)
      More walking,     Adequate infrastructure may be absent,      Congestion charges (Pearson-Stuttard et al.
       less car use,    speed a part of modern life.                2017; Shangguan et al. 2019); deliberate urban
       train rather                                                 design including cycling lanes, shared
         air travel                                                 micromobility, and extensive cycling
                                                                    infrastructure; synchronised/integrated transport
                                                                    system & timetable .

                                                                    Fair street space allocation (Creutzig et al.
                                                                    2020).




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                       5-98                                   Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                    Chapter 5                               IPCC AR6 WGIII


       Multifamily     Zonings that favour single family          Taxation, relaxation of single-family zoning
        housing,       homes have been dominant in planning       policies and land use regulation (Geffner 2017).
                       (Hagen 2016).

      Shifting from    Minimal meat required for protein          Tax on meat/beef in wealthier countries and/or
      meat to other    intake, especially in developing           households (Edjabou and Smed 2013; Säll and
         protein       countries for population suffering from    Gren 2015).
                       malnutrition and when plant-based
                       protein is lacking(Garnett 2011;           Nationally recommended diets (NRDs)
                       Sunguya et al. 2014; Behrens et al.        (Behrens et al. 2017; Garnett 2011; Sunguya et
                       2017; Godfray et al. 2018); Dominance      al. 2014; Godfray et al. 2018).
                       of market-based instruments limits
                       governments’ role to nudging citizens
                       with information about health and
                       wellbeing, and point-of-purchase
                       labelling (Pearson-Stuttard et al. 2017;
                       Shangguan et al. 2019).

        Material-       Resistance by architects and builders     Embodied carbon standards for buildings (IEA
         efficient     who might perceive risks with lean         2019c).
         product       designs. Cultural/ social norms. Policy
          design,      measures not keeping up with changes
        packaging      on the ground such as increased
                       consumption of packaging.

      Architectural    Lack of education, awareness and           Incentives for increased urban density and
       design with     capacity for new thinking, local air       incentives to encourage architectural forms with
      shading and      pollution.                                 lower surface-to-volume ratios and increased
       ventilation                                                shading support (Creutzig et al. 2016a).

 1
 2   Mobility services is one of the key areas where a combination of market-based and command-and-
 3   control measures have been implemented to persuade large numbers of people to get out of their
 4   automobiles and take up public transport and cycling alternatives (Gehl et al. 2011). Congestion charges
 5   are often complemented by other measures such as company subsidies for bicycles to incentivise the
 6   shift to public mobility services. Attracting people to public transport requires sufficient spatial
 7   coverage of transport with adequate level of provision, and good quality service at affordable fares
 8   (Sims et al. 2014; Moberg et al. 2019) (high evidence, high agreement). Cities such as Bogota, Buenos
 9   Aires and Santiago have seen rapid growth of cycling, resulting in an 6-fold of cyclists (Pucher and
10   Buehler 2017). Broadly, the history and type of city determines how quickly the transition to public
11   modes of transport can be achieved. For example, cities in developed countries enjoy an advantage in
12   that network of high-quality public transport predating the advent of automobiles, whereas cities in less
13   developed countries are latecomers in large-scale network infrastructure (Gota et al. 2019; UN-Habitat
14   2013).
15
16     5.6.2.3  Improve policies
17   ‘Improve’ policies focus on the efficiency and enhancement of technological performance of services
18   (Table). In mobility services, ‘improve’ policies aim at improving vehicles, comfort, fuels, transport
19   operations and management technologies; and in building, they include policies for improving
20   efficiency of heating systems and retrofitting existing buildings. Efficiency improvements in electric
21   cooking appliances, together with the ongoing decrease in prices of renewable energy technologies, is
22   opening policy opportunities to support households to adopt electrical cooking at mass scale (IEA
23   2017c; Puzzolo et al. 2019) (medium evidence, medium agreement). These actions towards cleaner
24   energy for cooking often come with cooking-related reduction of GHG emissions, even though the
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                    5-99                                  Total pages: 192
    Final Government Distribution                      Chapter 5                                IPCC AR6 WGIII


1   extent of the reductions is highly dependent on context and technology and fuel pathways (Martínez et
2   al. 2017; Mondal et al. 2018; Rosenthal et al. 2018; Serrano-Medrano et al. 2018; Hof et al. 2019) (high
3   evidence, high agreement) (see Box 5.6).
4
5                            Table 5.7 Examples of policies to enable “improve” options

      Mitigation Option         Perceived struggles to overcome                  Policy to overcome struggles
                                                                                          (Incentives)
     Lightweight vehicle,     Adequate infrastructure may be             Monetary incentives and traffic regulations
        hydrogen car,         absent, speed a part of modern life.       favouring EVs; investment in public
       electric vehicles,                                                charging infrastructure; car purchase tax
          ecodriving                                                     calculated by a combination of weight,
                                                                         CO2 and NOx emissions (Haugneland and
                                                                         Kvisle 2015; Globisch et al. 2018; Gnann
                                                                         et al. 2018; Lieven and Rietmann 2018;
                                                                         Rietmann and Lieven 2019).

       Use low carbon         Manufacturing and R&D costs,               Increasing recycling of construction and
     materials in dwelling    recycling processes and aesthetic          demolition waste; Incentives must be
            design            performance (Orsini and Marrone            available to companies in the waste
                              2019). Access to secondary materials       collection and recovery markets to offer
                              in the building sector (Nußholz et al.     recovered material at higher value
                              2019).                                     (Nußholz et al. 2019).

     Better insulation and    Policies to advance retrofitting and       Grants and loans through Development
          retrofitting        GHG emission reductions in buildings       Banks, building and heating system labels,
                              are laden with high expectations since     and technical renovation requirements to
                              they are core components of                continuously raise standards (Ortiz et al.
                              politically ambitious city climate         2019; Sebi et al. 2019); disclosure of
                              targets (Haug et al. 2010).                energy use, financing and technical
                                                                         assistance (Sebi et al. 2019).
                              Bringing building owners to
                              implement measures identified in
                              auditing results
                              Lack of incentive for building owners
                              to invest in higher efficiency than
                              required norms (Trencher et al. 2016).

      Widen low carbon        Access to finance, capacity, robust        Feed-in-tariffs and auctions to stimulate
       energy access          policies, affordability for poor           investment. Pay-as-you-go (PAYG) end-
                              households for off-grid solutions until    user financing scheme where customers
                              recently (Rolffs et al. 2015; Fuso         pay a small up-front fee for the equipment,
                              Nerini et al. 2018; Mulugetta et al.       followed by monthly payments, using
                              2019).                                     mobile payment system (Yadav et al. 2019;
                                                                         Rolffs et al. 2015).

           Improve            Supply side solution for low carbon        Building energy codes that set building
     illumination related     electricity provision.                     standards; grants and other incentives for
           emission                                                      R&D.

      Improve efficiency      Reliability of power in many               Driven by a combination of government
         of cooking           countries is not guaranteed; electricity   support for appliance purchases, shifting
         appliances           tariff is high in many countries;          subsidies from kerosene or LPG to
                              cooking appliances are mostly              electricity; community-level consultation
                              imported using scarce foreign              and awareness campaigns about the
                              currency.                                  hazards associated with indoor air
                                                                         pollution from the use of fuelwood, coal
                                                                         and kerosene, as well as education on the

    Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                     5-100                                    Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                                IPCC AR6 WGIII


                                                                     multiple benefits of electric cooking
                                                                     (Yangka and Diesendorf 2016; Martínez-
                                                                     Gómez et al. 2016; Gould and Urpelainen
                                                                     2018; Dendup and Arimura 2019;
                                                                     Pattanayak et al. 2019; Martínez et al.
                                                                     2017).

       Shift to LED lamp     People spend increasing amounts of      Government Incentive, utility incentive
                             time indoors, with heavy dependence     (Bertoldi et al. 2021). EU bans on
                             on and demand for artificial lighting   directional and non-directional halogen
                             environment (Ding et al. 2020).         bulbs (Franceschini et al. 2018).

      Solar water heating    Dominance of incumbent energy           Subsidy for solar heaters (Li et al. 2013;
                             source i.e. electricity; cheap          Bessa and Prado 2015; Sgouridis et al.
                             conventional energy; high initial       2016).
                             investment costs and long payback
                             (Joubert et al. 2016).

 1
 2   Table 5.7 highlights the significant progress made in the uptake of the Electrical Vehicle (EV) in
 3   Europe, driven by a suite of incentives and policies. Increased activity in widening Electric Vehicle
 4   (EV) use is also occurring in developing countries. The Indian Government’s proposal to reach the
 5   target of a 100% electric vehicle fleet by 2030 has stimulated investment in charging infrastructure that
 6   can facilitate diffusion of larger EVs (Dhar et al. 2017). Although the proposal was not converted into
 7   a policy, India's large and growing two-wheeler market has benefitted from the policy attention on EVs ,
 8   showing a significant potential for increasing the share of electric two-and three-wheelers in the short-
 9   term (Ahmad and Creutzig 2019). Similar opportunities exist for China where e-bikes have replaced
10   car trips and are reported to act as intermediate links in multimodal mobility (Cherry et al. 2016).
11
12   In recent years, policy interest has arisen to address the energy access challenge in Africa using low-
13   carbon energy technologies to meet energy for poverty reduction and climate action simultaneously
14   (Rolffs et al. 2015; Fuso Nerini et al. 2018; Mulugetta et al. 2019). This aspiration has been bolstered
15   on the technical front by significant advances in appliance efficiency such as light-emitting diode (LED)
16   technology, complemented by the sharp reduction in the cost of renewable energy technologies, and
17   largely driven by market stimulating policies and public R&D to mitigate risks (Alstone et al. 2015;
18   Zubi et al. 2019) (high evidence, high agreement).
19
20   5.6.3 Policies in transition phases
21   Demand-side policies tend to vary for different transition phases (high evidence, high agreement)
22   (Sandin et al. 2019; Roberts and Geels 2019). In the first phase, which is characterised by the emergence
23   or introduction of radical innovations in small niches, policies focus on: a) supporting R&D and
24   demonstration projects to enable learning and capability developments, b) nurturing the building of
25   networks and multi-stakeholder interactions, and c) providing future orientation through visions or
26   targets (Brown et al. 2003; López-García et al. 2019; Roesler and Hassler 2019). In the second phase,
27   the policy emphasis shifts towards upscaling of experiments, standardisation, cost reduction, and the
28   creation of early market niches (Ruggiero et al. 2018; Borghei and Magnusson 2018). In the third and
29   later phases, comprehensive policy mixes are used to stimulate mass adoption, infrastructure creation,
30   social acceptance and business investment (Fichter and Clausen 2016; Strauch 2020; Geels et al. 2018).
31   In the fourth phases, transitions can also be stimulated through policies that weaken or phase-out
32   existing regimes such as removing inefficient subsidies (for cheap petrol or fuel oil) that encourage
33   wasteful consumption, increasing taxes on carbon-intensive products and practices (Box 5.11), or


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-101                                   Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   substantially tightening regulations and standards (Kivimaa and Kern 2016; David 2017; Rogge and
 2   Johnstone 2017).

 3   START BOX 5.11 HERE
 4
 5                                   Box 5.11: Carbon pricing and fairness
 6
 7   Whether the public supports specific policy instruments for reducing greenhouse gas emissions is
 8   determined by cultural and political world views (Alberini et al. 2018; Cherry et al. 2017; Kotchen et
 9   al. 2017) and national position in international climate negotiations with major implications for policy
10   design. For example, policy proposals need to circumvent "solution aversion": that is, individuals are
11   more doubtful about the urgency of climate change mitigation if the proposed policy contradicts their
12   political worldviews (Campbell and Kay 2014). While there are reasons to believe that carbon pricing
13   is the most efficient way to reduce emissions, a recent literature – focusing on populations in Western
14   Europe and North America and carbon taxes – documents that efficiency feature alone is not what
15   makes citizens like or dislike carbon pricing schemes (Kallbekken et al. 2011; Carattini et al. 2017;
16   Klenert et al. 2018).
17
18   Citizens tend to ignore or doubt the idea that pricing carbon emissions reduces GHG emissions
19   (Kallbekken et al. 2011; Douenne and Fabre 2019; Maestre-Andrés et al. 2019). Further, citizens have
20   fairness concerns about carbon pricing (Büchs and Schnepf 2013; Douenne and Fabre 2019; Maestre-
21   Andrés et al. 2019), even if higher carbon prices can be made progressive by suitable use of revenues
22   (Rausch et al. 2011; Williams et al. 2015; Klenert and Mattauch 2016). There are also non-economic
23   properties of policy instruments that matter for public support: Calling a carbon price a "CO 2 levy"
24   alleviates solution aversion (Kallbekken et al. 2011; Carattini et al. 2017). It may be that the word “tax”
25   evokes a feeling of distrust in government and may have high costs, low benefits and distributional
26   effects (Strand 2020). Trust in politicians is negatively correlated with higher carbon prices (Hammar
27   and Jagers 2006; Rafaty 2018) and political campaigns for a carbon tax can lower public support for
28   them (Anderson et al. 2019). Few developing countries have adopted carbon taxes, probably due to high
29   costs, relatively low benefits, and distributional effects (Strand 2020).
30
31   To address these realities regarding support for carbon pricing, some studies have examined whether
32   specific uses of the revenue can increase public support for higher carbon prices (Carattini et al. 2017;
33   Beiser-McGrath and Bernauer 2019). Doubt about the environmental effectiveness of carbon pricing
34   may be alleviated if revenue from carbon pricing is earmarked for specific uses (Kallbekken et al. 2011;
35   Carattini et al. 2017) and higher carbon prices may then be supported (Beiser-McGrath and Bernauer
36   2019). This is especially the case for using the proceeds on “green investment” in infrastructure or
37   energy efficiency programmes (Kotchen et al. 2017). Further, returning the revenues to individuals in
38   a salient manner may increase public support and alleviate fairness proposals, given sufficient
39   information (Carattini et al. 2017; Klenert et al. 2018). Perceived fairness is one of the strongest
40   predictors of policy support (Jagers et al. 2010; Whittle et al. 2019).
41
42   END BOX 5.11 HERE
43   5.6.4 Policy sequencing and packaging to strengthen enabling conditions
44   Policy coordination is critical to manage infrastructure interdependence across sectors, and to avoid
45   trade-off effects (Raven and Verbong 2007; Hiteva and Watson 2019), specifically requiring the
46   consideration of interactions among supply-side and demand-side measures (Kivimaa and Virkamäki
47   2014; Rogge and Reichardt 2016; de Coninck et al. 2018; Edmondson et al. 2019) (high evidence, high

     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-102                                Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                            IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   agreement). For example, the amount of electricity required for cooking can overwhelm the grid which
 2   can lead to failure, causing end-users to shift back to traditional biomass or fossil fuels (Ateba et al.
 3   2018; Israel-Akinbo et al. 2018); thus grid stability policies need to be undertaken in conjunction.
 4   Policy makers operate in a politically dynamic national and international environment, and their policies
 5   often reflect their contextual situations and constraints with regards to climate-related reforms (Levin
 6   et al. 2012; Copland 2019), including differentiation between developed and developing countries (Beer
 7   and Beer 2014; Roy et al. 2018c) (high evidence, high agreement). Variables such as internal political
 8   stability, equity, informality (Box 5.10), macro-economic conditions, public debt, governance of
 9   policies, global oil prices, quality of public services, and the maturity of green technologies play
10   important roles in determining policy directions.
11
12   Sequencing policies appropriately is a success factor for climate policy regimes (high evidence, high
13   agreement). In most situations policy measures require a preparatory phase that prepares the ground by
14   lowering the costs of policies, communicating the costs and benefits to citizens, and building coalitions
15   for policies, thus reducing political resistance (Meckling et al. 2017). This policy sequencing aims to
16   incrementally relax or remove barriers over time to enable significant cumulative increases in policy
17   stringency and create coalitions that support future policy development (Pahle et al. 2018). German
18   policies into renewables began with funding for RD&D, then subsidies for demonstration projects
19   during the 1970s and 1980s, and continued to larger-scale projects such as ‘Solar Roofs’ programmes
20   in the 1990s, including the scaled-up FITs for solar power (Jacobsson and Lauber 2006). These policies
21   led to industrial expansion in wind and solar energy systems, giving rise to powerful renewables interest
22   coalitions that defend existing measures and lend political support for further action. Policy sequencing
23   has also been deployed to introduce technology bans and strict performance standards with a view to
24   eliminate emissions as the end goal, and may the involve simultaneous support low carbon options
25   while deliberately phasing out established technological regime (Rogge and Johnstone 2017).
26
27   As a key contending policy instrument, carbon pricing also requires embedding into policy packages
28   (high evidence, medium agreement). Pricing may be regressive and perceived as additional costs by
29   households and industry, making investments into green infrastructure politically unfeasible, as
30   examples from France and Australia show (Copland 2019; Douenne and Fabre 2020). Reforms that
31   would push up household energy expenses are often left aside for fear of how citizens, especially the
32   poor, would react or cope with higher bills (Martinez and Viegas 2017; Tesfamichael et al. 2021) (high
33   evidence, medium agreement). This makes it important to precede carbon pricing with investments into
34   renewable energy and low carbon transport modes (Biber et al. 2017; Tvinnereim and Mehling 2018),
35   and especially support developing countries by building up low-carbon energy and mobility
36   infrastructures and technologies, thus reducing resistance to carbon pricing (Creutzig 2019).
37   Additionally, carbon pricing receives higher acceptance if fairness and distributive consideration are
38   made explicit in revenue distribution (see Box 5.11).
39
40   The effectiveness of a policy package is determined by design decisions as well as the wider governance
41   context that include the political environment, institutions for coordination across scales, bureaucratic
42   traditions, and judicial functioning (Howlett and Rayner 2013; Rogge and Reichardt 2013; Rosenow et
43   al. 2016) (high evidence, high agreement). Policy packages often emerge through interactions between
44   different policy instruments as they operate in either complementary or contradictory ways, resulting
45   from conflicting policy goals (Cunningham et al. 2013; Givoni et al. 2013). An example includes the
46   acceleration in shift from traditional biomass to the adoption of modern cooking fuel for 80 million
47   households in rural India over a very short period of 4 years (2016-2020), which employed a
48   comprehensive ‘policy package’ including financial incentives, infrastructural support and
49   strengthening of the supply chain to induce households to shift towards a clean cooking fuel from the
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-103                                Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   use of biomass (Kumar 2019). This was operationalised by creating a LPG supply chain by linking oil
 2   and gas companies with distributors to assure availability, create infrastructure for local storage along
 3   with an improvement of the rural road network, especially in the rural context (Sankhyayan and
 4   Dasgupta 2019). State governments initiated separate policies to increase the distributorship of LPG in
 5   their states (Kumar et al. 2016). Similarly, policy actions for scaling up electric vehicles need to be well
 6   designed and coordinated where EV policy, transport policy and climate policy are used together,
 7   working on different decision points and different aspects of human behaviour (Barton and Schütte
 8   2017). The coordination of the multiple policy actions enables co-evolution of multiple outcomes that
 9   involve shifting towards renewable energy production, improving access to charging infrastructure,
10   carbon pricing and other GHG measures (Wolbertus et al. 2018).
11
12   Design of policy packages should consider not only policies that support low carbon transitions but also
13   those that challenge existing carbon-intensive regimes, generating not just policy “winners” but also
14   “losers” (Carley and Konisky 2020) (high evidence, high agreement). The winners include low carbon
15   innovators and entrepreneurs, while the potential losers include incumbents with vested interests in
16   sustaining the status quo (Mundaca et al. 2018; Monasterolo and Raberto 2019). Low carbon policy
17   packages would benefit from looking beyond climate benefits to include non-climate benefits such as
18   health benefits, fuel poverty reductions and environmental co-benefits (Ürge-Vorsatz et al. 2014;
19   Sovacool et al. 2020b). The uptake of decentralised energy services using solar PV in rural areas in
20   developing countries is one such example where successful initiatives are linked to the convergence of
21   multiple policies that include import tariffs, research incentives for R&D, job creation programmes,
22   policies to widen health and education services, and strategies for increased safety for women and
23   children (Kattumuri and Kruse 2019; Gebreslassie 2020).
24
25   The energy efficient lighting transition in Europe represents a good case of the formation of policy
26   coalitions that led to the development of policy packages. As attention for energy efficiency in Europe
27   increased in the 1990s, policymakers attempted to stimulate energy-saving lamp diffusion through
28   voluntary measures. But policies stimulated only limited adoption. Consumers perceived CFLs as
29   giving ‘cold’ light, being unattractively shaped, taking too long to achieve full brightness, unsuitable
30   for many fixtures, and unreliable (Wall and Crosbie 2009). Still, innovations by major CFL and LED
31   multinationals continued. Increasing political attention to climate change and criticisms from
32   environmental NGOs (e.g. WWF, Greenpeace) strengthened awareness about the inefficiency of
33   incandescent light bulbs (ILBs), which led to negative socio-cultural framings that associated ILBs with
34   energy waste (Franceschini and Alkemade 2016). The combined pressures from the lighting industry,
35   NGOs and member states led the European Commission to introduce the 2009 ban of ILBs of more
36   than 80W, progressing to lower-wattage bans in successive years. While the ILB ban initially mainly
37   boosted CFL diffusion, it also stimulated LED uptake. LED prices decreased quickly by more than 85%
38   between 2008 and 2012 (Sanderson and Simons 2014), because of scale economies, standardisation and
39   commoditisation of LED chip technology, and improved manufacturing techniques. Because of further
40   rapid developments to meet consumer tastes, LEDs came to be seen as the future of domestic lighting
41   (Franceschini et al. 2018). Acknowledging these changing views, the 2016 and 2018 European bans on
42   directional and non-directional halogen bulbs explicitly intended to further accelerate the LED
43   transition and reduce energy consumption for residential lighting.
44
45   In summary, more equitable societies are associated with high levels of social trust and enables action
46   that reduce GHG emissions. To this end, people play an important role in the delivery of demand-side
47   mitigation options within which efficiency and ‘improve’ options dominate. Policies that are aimed at
48   behaviour and lifestyle changes come with political risks for policy makers. However, the potential
49   exists for broadening demand-side interventions to include ‘avoid’ and ‘shift’ policies. Longer term
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-104                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                   Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   thinking and implementation that involves careful sequencing of policies as well as designing policy
 2   packages that address multiple co-benefits would be critical to manage interactions among supply-side
 3   and demand-side options to accelerate mitigation.
 4
 5
 6   5.7 Knowledge gaps
 7   Knowledge gap 1: Better metric to measure actual human well-being
 8   Knowledge on climate action that starts with the social practices and how people live in various
 9   environments, cultures, contexts and attempts to improve their well-being, is still in its infancy. In
10   models, climate solutions remain supply-side oriented, and evaluated against GDP, without
11   acknowledging the reduction in well-being due to climate impacts. GDP is a poor metric of human well-
12   being, and climate policy evaluation requires better grounding in relation to decent living standards and
13   or similar benchmarks. Actual solutions will invariably include demand, service provisioning and end
14   use. Literature on how gender, informal economies mostly in developing countries, and solidarity and
15   care frameworks translate into climate action, but also how climate action can improve the life of
16   marginalised groups remains scarce. The working of economic systems under a well-being driven rather
17   than GDP driven paradigm requires better understanding.
18
19   Knowledge gap 2: Evaluation of climate implication of the digital economy
20   The digital economy, as well as shared and circular economy, is emerging as template for great
21   narratives, hopes and fears. Yet, there is few systematic evaluations of what is already happening and
22   what can govern it towards a better narrative. Research needs to better gauge energy trends for rapidly
23   evolving systems like data centres, increased use of social media and influence of consumption and
24   choices, AI, blockchain, implication of digital divide among social groups and countries on well-being.
25   Governance decisions on AI, indirectly fostering either climate harming or climate mitigating activities
26   remain unexplored. Better integration of mitigation models and consequential life cycle analysis is
27   needed for assessing how digitalisation, shared economy and circular economy change material and
28   energy demand.
29
30   Knowledge gap 3: Scenario modelling of services
31   Scenarios start within parameter-rich models carrying more than a decade-long legacy of supply side
32   technologies that are not always gauged in recent technological developments. Service provisioning
33   systems are not explicitly modelled, and diversity in concepts and patterns of lifestyles rarely
34   considered. A new class of flexible and modular models with focus on services and activities, based on
35   variety of data sources including big data collected and compiled is needed. There is scope for more
36   sensitivity analysis on two aspects to better guide further detailed studies on societal response to policy.
37   These aspects need to explore which socio-behavioural aspects/ organisation changes has biggest
38   impact on energy/emissions reductions, and on the scale for take-back effects, due to interdependence
39   on inclusion or exclusion of groups of people. Models mostly consider behavioural change free, and
40   don’t account for how savings due to “avoid” measures may be re-spent. Most quantitatively
41   measurable service indicators e.g. pkm or tkm are also inadequate to measure services in the sense of
42   well-being contributions. More research is needed on how to measure e.g. accessibility, social inclusion
43   etc. Otherwise services will also be poorly represented in scenarios.
44
45   Knowledge gap 4: Dynamic interaction between individual, social, and structural drivers of
46   change
47   Better understanding is required on: (1) More detailed causal mechanisms in the mutual interactions
48   between individual, social, and structural drivers of change and how these vary over time, i.e. what is
     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-105                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                              IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   their relative importance in different transition phases; (2) how narratives associated with specific
 2   technologies, group identities, and climate change influence each other and interact over time to enable
 3   and constrain mitigation outcomes; (3) how social media influences the development and impacts of
 4   narratives about low carbon transitions; (4) the effects of social movements (for climate justice, youth
 5   climate activism, fossil fuel divestment, and climate action more generally) on social norms and
 6   political change, especially in less developed countries; (5) how existing provisioning systems and
 7   social practices destabilise through the weakening of various lock-in mechanisms, and resulting
 8   deliberate strategies for accelerating demand-side transitions; (6) a dynamic understanding of
 9   feasibility, which addresses the dynamic mechanisms that lower barriers or drive mitigation options
10   over the barriers. (7) how shocks like prolonged pandemic impacts willingness and capacity to change
11   and their permanency for various social actors and country contexts. The debate on the most powerful
12   leverage point/s and policies for speeding up change in social and technological systems need to be
13   resolved with more evidence. Discussion on the policy interdependence and implications of end-user
14   and efficiency focused strategies have only just started suggesting an important area for future research.
15
16
17   Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
18   FAQ 5.1 What can every person do to limit warming to 1.5°C?
19   People can be educated through knowledge transfer so they can act in different roles, and in each role
20   everyone can contribute to limit global warming to 1.5°C. As citizens, with enough knowledge can
21   organise and put political pressure on the system. Role models can set examples to others. Professionals
22   (e.g., engineers, urban planners, teachers, researchers) can change professional standards in consistency
23   with decarbonisation; e.g., urban planners and architects can design physical infrastructures to facilitate
24   low-carbon mobility and energy use by making walking and cycling safe for children. Rich investors
25   can make strategic plan to divest from fossils and invest in carbon-neutral technologies. As consumers,
26   especially if one belongs to the top 10% of the world population in terms of income, can limit
27   consumption, especially in mobility, and explore the good life consistent with sustainable consumption.
28   Policy makers support individual actions in certain contexts not only by economic incentives, such as
29   carbon pricing, but also by interventions that understand complex decision making processes, habits,
30   and routines. Examples of such interventions include but are not limited to choice architectures and
31   nudges that set green options as default, shift away from cheap petrol or gasoline, increasing taxes on
32   carbon-intensive products, or substantially tightening regulations and standards support shifts in social
33   norms, and thus can be effective beyond the direct economic incentive.
34
35   FAQ 5.2 How does society perceive transformative change?
36   Human induced global warming, together with other global trends and events, such as digitalisation and
37   automation, and the COVID-19 pandemic, induces changes in labour markets, and bring large
38   uncertainty and ambiguity. History and psychology reveal that societies can thrive in these
39   circumstances if they openly embrace uncertainty on the future and try out ways to improve life.
40   Tolerating ambiguity can be learned, e.g., by interacting with history, poetry and the arts. Sometimes
41   religion and philosophy also help.
42
43   As a key enabler, novel narratives created in a variety of ways e.g., by advertising, images,
44   entertainment industry, help to break away from the established meanings, values and discourses and
45   the status quo. For example, discourses that frame comfortable public transport service to avoid stress
46   from driving cars on busy, congested roads help avoid car driving as a status symbol and create a new
47   social norm to shift to public transport. Discourses that portray plant based protein and as healthy and
48   natural promote and stabilise particular diets. Novel narratives and inclusive processes help strategies
49   to overcome multiple barriers. Case studies demonstrate that citizens support transformative changes if
50   participatory processes enable a design that meets local interests and culture. Promising narratives


     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                  5-106                                 Total pages: 192
     Final Government Distribution                  Chapter 5                             IPCC AR6 WGIII


 1   specify that even as speed and capabilities differ humanity embarks on a joint journey towards well-
 2   being for all and a healthy planet.
 3
 4   FAQ 5.3 Is demand reduction compatible with growth of human well-being?
 5   There is a growing realisation that mere monetary value of income growth is insufficient to measure
 6   national welfare and individual well-being. Hence, any action towards climate change mitigation is best
 7   evaluated against a set of indicators that represent a broader variety of needs to define individual well-
 8   being, macroeconomic stability, and planetary health. Many solutions that reduce primary material and
 9   fossil energy demand, and thus reduce GHG emissions, provide better services to help achieve well-
10   being for all.
11
12   Economic growth measured by total or individual income growth is a main driver of GHG emissions.
13   Only a few countries with low economic growth rates have reduced both territorial and consumption-
14   based GHG emissions from, typically by switching from fossil fuels to renewable energy and by
15   reduction in energy low/zero carbon fuels, but until now at insufficient rates and levels for stabilising
16   global warming at 1.5°C. High deployment of low/zero carbon fuels and associated rapid reduction in
17   demand and use of coal, gas, and oil can further reduce the interdependence between economic growth
18   and GHG emissions.
19
20




     Do Not Cite, Quote or Distribute                 5-107                                 Total pages: 192